Aq7220 Mini Otdr

AQ7220 mini-OTDR Instruction Manual
ANDO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Copyright ANOO ELECTRIC co., LTD. JAPAN 1995
AS-62395-1
Rev. 3.0
WARRNTY
All Ando Electric's products have been inspected with our severe quality assurance standards.
However, if any defect or trouble occurrng during transportation is found, contact to our service agency. Do not repair a defective ANDO' s product by yourself in order to avoid any physical damage. A repair of defective ANDO' s product must be performed by a service
engineer approved by ANDO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Ando Electric will replace, at no charge, the defective product(s) that occur within one
year of the original date of
product delivery.
However, the defects due to an operation error, modification or retrofit by the customer or those caused by the natural disaster.s are serviced with charge.
PREFACE
This manual describes the handling and mantenance of
the AQ7220 Series mini-OTDR
(referred to as this unit).
Before using this unit for the first time, carefully read the "LASER SAFETY"
~ "PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY" at the beginning of
this manuaL.
this unit, read Chapter i, "OVERVIEW". The user who is going to operate this unit for the first time should first read Chapter 2,
To understand the features and functions of
"PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION". The basic measuring procedure is described in Chapter 3, "BASIC MEASUREMENT".
Practical operating examples that wil be helpful in using this unit are described in Chapter 4, "OPERATION".
Periodic inspection and maintenance of unit is required. This procedure for cleaning optical connectors and replacing batteries is described in Chapter 7, "MAINTENANCE AND DAILY INSPECTIONS".
LASER SAFETY
Initial Safety.Information for Laser Source Unit.
The Specifications for these Units are as follows. AQ7223
Laser Type
AQ7225
AQ7229
FP-Laser InGaAsP
1
FP-Laser InGaAsP
1
FP-Laser AlGaAsP/InGaAsP
1
Laser Class According to 21 CRF 1040.10 (Canada, USA) Laser Class According to
EN60825 : 199 1
3A
3A
3A
(Europe) Pulse Width
0.02,0.1,0.4, 1,4, 10
0.02,0.1,0.4, 1,4,10
llsec
10llm
13 1011550:t30nm
0.02,0.1,0.4, 1,4, 10
llsec
llsec
62.5 llm
Beam Diameter
Wavelength
10 llm
1310:t30nm
85011300:t30nm
NOTE
Canada, USA
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
The Laser safety warning labels are fixed on the optical unit
NOTE
Europe
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIE\
DIRECTYL VVTH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT

(EN60825 : 1991)
A sheet of laser safety warning labels are included with the optical unit. You MUST language onto the outside of stick the labels in the local the mainframe, in a position where they are clearly visible to anyone using the instrument.
You MUST return instruments with malfunctioning laser boxes to a Service Center for
repair and calibration.
WARNING
Use of controls or adjustments or pedormance of procedures other than those specified for the laser source may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
WARNING
Refer Servicing only to qualified and anthorized personneL.
WARNING
Do not emit a laser light when an optical fiber is not connected on the optical output this instrument. connector. The optical output connector is located on the top panel of The LD unit emits laser light when either "REAL TIME" or "AVERAGING START/STOP" button is pressed. The buttons are located on the front panel of this instrument. this instrument while a laser light is emitted. "LASER ON" is displayed on the display of
WARNING
Under no circumstances look into the end of an optical cable attached to the optical output when the device is operational. The laser radiation is not visible to the human eye, but it can seriously damage your eyesight.
LASER SAFETY
Informations .et Consignew de Scurit Relatives I'Utilisation des Lasers.
Les Spcifications des Modules Laser sont les Suivantes: AQ7223 AQ7225
Laser Type
Laser Class
AQ7229
FP - Laser
InGaAsP
1
FP-Laser InGaAsP
1
FP-Laser
AlGaAsP/IGaAsP
1
According to 21 CRF
1040.1 0
(Canada, USA)
Laser Class
3A
3A
3A
According to EN60825 :1991 (Europe) Pulse Width
0.02,0.1,0.4,1,4,10 0.02,0.1,0.4,
llsec
1,4, 10 0.02,0.1,0.4, 1,4, 10
llsec
10 llm
llsec
Beam Diameter
Wavelength
Canada, USA
10 llm
62.5llm
85011300:t30nm
1310:t30nm
131011550:t30nm
Remarque
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
Les etiquettes de scurit sont affiches sur Ie module laser.
Remarque
Europe
RA YONNEMENT LASER
NE PAS REGARDER FIXEMENT LE RAYON

NI LE REGARDER DIRECTEMENT
AVEC DES APPAREILS OPTIQUES
(EN60825 : 1 991 )
Les etiquettes de scurit sont incluses dans le module laser. Il est obligatoire de coller
une etiquette en langage local l exterieur de l appareil de telle sorte qu' elle soit parfaitement visible par 1 'utilisateur.
11 est obligatoire de retourner tout appareil prsentant un dfaut de fonctionnement du

laser uniquement un centre de rparation.
Attention
L 'utilisation du laser en dehors de ses limites de performances et des procdures dfinies par peut conduire une exposition dangereuse de 1 'utilisateur aux radiations.
Attention
Seulle personnel autoris par est qualifi pour intervenir sur le laser.
Attention
Ne pas mettre de lumire quand la fibre optique n'est pas connect au connecteur de sorite. Le connecteur optique de sorite est plac surle paneau du dessus de cet instrument. La diode laser met quand le bouton c(REAL TIME:: ou c(A VERAGING START/STOP:: est activ Ces boutons sont situs sur la face avant de cet instrument.
c(LASER ON:: s' affche sur l' affichage de cet instrument pendent l' mlssion de la
lumire.
Attention
En aucun cas ne tenter de regarder l'extrmit de la fibre optique attache au connecteUf
lorsque le laser est en activit.
Bien que la lumire mise par le laser ne soit pas visible elle peut cependant tre dangereuse pour la vue.
ILASER SAFETY
Sicherheitsinformation fr Laser Quellen
Die Spezifikationen fur die Lasereinschbe sind wie folgt: AQ7225 AQ7223
Laser Type
Laser Class
AQ7229
FP-Laser InGaAsP
3A
FP - Laser
InGaAsP
3A
FP-Laser A1GaAsP/InGaAsP
3A
According to EN60825 :1991 (Europe) Pulse Width
0.02,0.1,0.4, l, 4, 10
llsec
0.02, 0.1, 0.4, 1,4, 10
0.02,0.1,0.4, 1,4,10
llsec
llsec
10 llm
Beam Diameter
Wavelength
Europe
10llm
62.5llm
85011300:t30nm
1310:t30nm
131011550:t30nm
Hinweis
LASEP..T RAHLUNG
NICHT IN DEN STRAHL BLiCKEN
AUCH NICHT MIT OPTISCHEN INSTRUMENTEN

LASERKLASSE 3A (EN6082S : 1991)
Ein Blatt mit Laser Warnaufklebern ist jedem Lasereinschub beigefugt. Die Aufkleber mssen in der Landessprache, fur den Anwender gut sichtbar, an der Aussenseite des
Grundgerates angebracht werden.
Defekte Lasereinschube mussen zur Reparatur oder zur Kalibration an ein Service Buro geschickt werden.
WARNUNG
Bedienung, Abgleicharbeiten oder die Durchfuhrung von Tests, die nicht im Handbuch angegeben sind, knnen zum Austritt gefhrlicher Strahlung fuhren.
W ARNUNG
Reparaturarbeiten durfen nur von qualifliziertem und bevollmachtigtem Personal
durchgefuhr werden.
W ARNUNG
1st kein Lichtwellenleiter an den optischen Ausgabeanschlu angeschlossen ist, die ENABLE stellen. Der optische Ausgabe-Anschlu befindet Laserausgabe nicht auf sich auf der Oberseite des Systems. Der Laserstrahl wird durch Betatigen der "REAL TIME" oder "AVERAGING ST ART/STOP"-Taste an der Vorderwand des Systems ausgegeben. Wahrend der Laserstrahl ausgegeben wird, zeigt des LCD-Display des Systems "LASER ON" an.
WARNUNG
Wenn der Laser eingeschaltet ist, darfunter keinen Umstanden in das Ende des optischen Kabels oder in den Laserausgang am Gerat geschaut werden. Der Laserstrahl ist fur das menschliche Auge unsichtbar, kann aber das Sehvermgen
ernsthaft verletzen.
IPRECAUTION WHN HADLING POWER

The system power supply can be used in two ways. Before using any of these ways, thoroughly read the respective precautionary notes.
(l External power supply & charger (for drving the system unit and for charging up
SUPPLY . .
the battery pack)
This is an accessory of the system
unit. The CHARGE lamp keeps to light durng battery charge-up, and
it goes out when the battery pack is fully charged up. The charger can charge up a single
battery pack only.
(Drawing No. : GG-62395-81)
To pr~vent electrical shock hazards, be sure to ground the AC power circuit of the dedicate AQ7220 series charger.
CAUTION
Not dustproof nor the waterproof are given to the AC adaptor. The AC adaptor and
AQ7220 might break down when the AC adaptor is used in outdoor. Please use only
indoors.
CAUTION
When AQ7220 is used only with the AC adaptor, the battery is recommended to be removed. The decrease in the battery longevity because of the overcharge can be prevented.
Description of supply voltage of charger The supply voltage using range for chargers is as given in the table below:
To prevent fire accidents, be sure to use specified fuses given in the table below:
-LINE
100 to 240 V
FUSE
F 2A 250V
60 VA
48 to 63 Hz
To install fuses, pull out the fuse holder, set a pair of two fuses and
then insert them to the unit.
To insert or pull out the power plug, be sure to do it while holding the plug under the power OFF status.
CI Battery pack
Use the dedicated battery pack. Model name: LC-SA122R3AU Manufacturer: Panasonic (Matsushita Electric)
Before using the battery pack, thoroughly read the battery pack handling precautions.
PRECAUTIONS FOR BATTERY PACK HANDLING I

(1) Do not throw the battery pack into a fire.
(2) Do not short the terminals.

(3) Do not attempt to disassemble the battery pack.
( 4) Take care not to bump or drop the battery pack.
(5) To prevent any troubles of
battery pack, visually inspect the battery pack on a
periodic basis for damage or solution leakage.

(6) Storage of . For storage of
battery pack
the battery pack, select a cool
location where the temperature does
not rise.
. Do not place the battery pack in a place where is exposed to direct sunlight or
where the temperature may rise (e.g., automobile dashboard). Otherwise, it shortens the battery life and results in frequent self-discharging.
(7) Do not use a battery charger other than the specially ~csigned for the battery pack.
(8) When the battery pack is to be stored for a long period of
time without using,
remove it from the main unit because a very small current flows even if power is
turned off.
(9) The operating time may slightly shorten after a long time of its storage (1 to 2 years at the room temperature). If such is the case, charge the battery pack for about 12
to 15 hours. It should be charged at least every 6 months.
(10) Before removing the battery pack, turn off the main unit power switch and
disconnect the external power supply.
(1l) The battery pack should be charged at a temperature between 5 to 35C, because it
is liable to be affected by the ambient temperature.

(12) When the battery alarm LED lights, charge the battery as early as possible. If
the battery pack is used continuously without being charged, or if the main unit is left turned on, an overcharge condition will occur, resulting in the shortening of the
battery life.
(13) If
battery solution (dilute sulfuric acid) comes into contact with the skin by accident, flush with water immediately.
IPRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY

o Read this manual and the precautions for safety in it carefully
before using the device.
o Maintain this manual at a location easy to access.
This manual employs the following safety alert symbols to provide basic safety rules and are intended to ensure correct use of the product and thus to prevent precautions. They
personal injury that could occur to your or other persons and physical damage. The
the safety alert symbols are as follow. Please take the time to familialize Y01lself with this section before going to other
meaning of sections of
this manuaL.
. Safety precautions and rules to be observed are identified with the following safety
alert symbols:
e
(S
This symbol represents safety precautions or rules (including Warning and Danger notices) that require users' attention. (Actual "Signal Word" is entered inside the symboL.) This symbol represents safety precautions or rules users must observe. (Actual "Signal Word" is entered inside the symboL.)
This symbol represents banned user actions.
. Sample safety alert symbols
WARNING
This symbol identifies hazards which can result in death or serious personal injury if this warning is unheeded and the system is improperly handled or operated.
This symbol identifies hazards which can result in personal injury or physical damage if this caution is unheeded and the system is improperly handled or operated.
CAUTION
This symbol identifies hazards which can result in fuming or fire hazard if this caution or safety rule is unheeded and they system is improperly handled or operated.
This symbol identifies hazards which can result in electric shock if this
precaution or safety rule is unheeded and the system is improperly handled or operated. .
This symbol identifies hazards which can result in bodily hurt if this
precaution or safety rule is uneeded and the system is improperly handled
or operated.
6 ..
This symbol instructs to remove the power plug from the plug outlet to ensure work safety.
This symbol identifies general safety rules to be observed by users.
1. Restrictions on the Operating Environment
(9 (9
Take care so that water may not flow into the system or the system may not be exposed to water, otherwise fire hazard, electric shock or system failure can result.
2. Restrictions on the Operating Conditions
Be sure to use the specified battery pack and charger, otherwise fire hazard, electric shock or system failure can result.
3. Setup and Installation Work

3.1 Precautions intended for setup and installation personnel
When engaged in operation with this equipment held in hand, for instance, be careful to its dropping, otherwise a bodily injury can result.
Avoid disorderly, complex wiring from the power supply, otherwise cable overheating or fire hazard can result.
Insert the power plug securely to the plug outlet, otherwise fire hazard or electric shock can result if a metal piece touches the power plug.
3.2 Restrictions and bans on the installation environment and conditions
it
(9 (9 (9 (9
Don't install the system into a highly humid or dusty place, otherwise electric shock or system failure can result.
Don't install the system on an unstable base or inclined place, otherwise personal injury can result when it falls or tumbles down. Don't install the system in a place exposed to severe vibrations or shocks, otherwise personal injury can result when it falls or tumbles down.
Don't insert or drop a metal bar from the system openings, otherwise fire
hazard, electric shock or other personal injury can result.
Keep the power cord away from the heating units, otherwise fire hazard or electric shock can result from the damaged coating.
Hold the plug portion when pulling the power cord out of
0 (9 0
0
(9
the outlet,
otherwise fire hazard or electric shock can result from the damaged cord.
Don't handle the power cord with wet hands, otherwise electric shock can result.
Don't place the system in a high temperature environment such as a place exposed to direct sunlight or inside of a vehicle, otherwise system failure can result from overheating of inside the system.
3.3 Banned actions in the system installation
Don't try to move the system without making sure that the power plug has been removed from the plug outlet and external connection cables have been disconnected.
Don't damage or rework the power cord, otherwise fire hazard or electric shock can result from the cord damaged by heavy substance placed on it, excessive heat or tension applied to it.
4. Precautions Before Starting the System

Please read this instruction manual carefully and familiarize yourself
with the
information provided in it.
5. Usage (1/2)
Operate the system in accordance with the procedure provided in the

instruction manuaL.
0
.. --
When a safety alert symbol (Warning, Danger or Caution mark) is provided, operation instructions provided in the manual must be heeded.
Area surrounding the system must be free of a water filled container or metal pieces, otherwise fire hazard, electric shock or system failure can result from the spilt water or dropped metal piece.
Do not use not specified batteries in any devices using batteries. not use new batteries and old ones in mixture.
Also, do
Be sure to insert a battery after making sure its polarity indication (its plus and minus directions). If wrong in this direction, it can cause a fire hazard, bodily injury or contamination of the surrounding due to a rupture or liquid spill of the battery.
Don't rework the power cord nor forcibly bend, twist or pull it, otherwise fire hazard or electrc shock can result.
Don't try to disassemble or retrofit the system, otherwise fire hazard,
~ GJ 0 0
6
g
electric shock or bodily injury can result.
Do not short the charging terminal with a piece of metal, otherwise fire hazard or system failure can result. Do not charge the charging terminal to which water drop sticks intact, otherwise fire hazard or electric shock can result.
When the system is not to be used for a long period of time, remove the power plug from the plug outlet to ensure safety, otherwise fire hazard, electric shock or system failure car result from lightning.
Use caution when opening or closing doors on the system so that your fingers may not be pinched.
5. Usage (2/2)
(9 (9
Do not use this equipment at OC or less, otherwise the indicator operation

cannot be guaranteed.
Be sure to insert or remove connectors and others to and from this equipment after turning off its power supply, otherwise fire hazard, electric shock or system failure can result.
6. Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic system maintenance and inspection is recommended. When you have any question on the maintenance or inspection, contact us at the list
attached to the end of this manuaL.
7. Actions Required for a System Failure

If
Dusts settled inside the system for a long period can cause fire hazard or
system failure.
the power cord is damaged, contact us for its replacement. Continued use of such cord can cause fire hazard or electric shock.
6 6
Should a foreign substance dropped into the system, turn the system power off first, then remove the power cord from the plug outlet and contact us. Fire hazard, electric shock or system failure can result from continued use the system in such state. of
Should an abnormal state such as fume, smoke or offensive odor is detected on the system, turn the system power switch off immediately, then remove the power plug from the plug outlet. Making sure that fume or smoke is not present any more, contact us for repair. Continued use of the system in such state can result in fire hazard, electric shock or system failure. Never try to fix the trouble on your own. It is an extremely dangerous try.
Should the system is dropped or damaged, turn the system power off, remove the power plug from the plug outlet, then contact us. Continued use of the system in such state can result in fire hazard, electric
shock or system failure.
6 ti
Should the system failed, customers strongly advised not to try fix the failure, otherwise electric shock or personal injury can result. Our warranty is not applicable to the system repaired without previous notice to and consent from us.
8. Precautions on Disposal
~
A
Don't place the system in fire for its disposal, otherwise fire hazard or burn can result if it exploded.
Hazard Identification
This manual uses the following hazard identification markings that the operators and service personnel must be aware of all hazards associated with this system.
1. Dangers, Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
(1) Priority of hazard information
The priority of hazard information is as follows:

Dangers:: Warnings;: Cautions;: Notes
hazard information
(2) Meanings of
DAI'1GER: Identifies immediate hazards that will result in death or severe personal injury. This is the highest priority hazard
identification marking.
WARNING: Identifies hazards or unsafe practices that can result in severe

personal injury.
CAUTION: Identifies hazards or unsafe practices that can result in damage to system units or can "interrpt" system operations.
Note: Identifies an auxiliary information about exceptional rules,

corrections, and restrictions.
2. Reference Pages
The page or pages that you should refer to are shown. An example of "See Page 2-1".
3. Pictorials of
Operation Keys
This manual shows the system operation keys as follows:

i i
Indicates a key top character.

J
Indicates a front panel or rear panel name.
Please note the following points when you use AQ7220 mini-OTDR
CAUTION Please power off the instrument immediately \vhen the battery alarni is displayed. Moreover, please be sure that the instrument is powered off after use. Do not leave it power on, otherwise the internal data may be destroyed or the instrument
may not start up.
CAUTION Display being deleted while starting and repeating reset show that the amount of the
battery remainder decreases very much. the instrument immediately and charge with the battery or For this case, please power off switch to the AC operation. Do not leave it power on, otherwise the internal data may be destroyed or the instrument may not start up.
CAUTION Exchanging a built-in battery, please remove the charger from the instrument and be sure
the instrument is powered off.
Otherwise, the internal data may be destroyed or the instrument may not start up.
CAUTION There is the Ni-Cd battery for the internal memory besides a built-in battery in the instrument.
Please power on the instrument for 10 hours or more a month to charge this N i-Cd
battery. Otherwise, it may not be able to reactivate.
Note Please power off and on again after the formatting of the internal memory.
Note There is a possibility that the data of an internal memory is destroyed when displayed on the start screen immediately after the power on as follows.
Internal memories are need to format. Pushing the encoder to format. Do you format? (Y IN) Y
In this case, please execute the format as a rule. (When the format is executed, all the internal memory data is deleted.) the internal memory data can When the format is not executed, neither save nor recall of be likely to be done. When the internal memory data is nec~ssary by all means, the data might be able to be revived according to the following procedures. (Whether the data can be revived differs the internal memory data) according to the state of destruction of
Step l: "N" is selected on the format demand screen. Step2: Please power off and on again. When the format demand screen is displayed again, the internal memory data cannot be revived. Please select "Y" and execute the format. Step3: The necessary data is recalled with File Mode. There is the data which cannot be recalled according to the state of destruction of an internal memory, too. Step4: The recalled data is saved on the Floppy Disk or the PCMCIA Memory Card. the necessary data are completed, the Floppy Disk or the Step5: When recall and save of PCMCIA Memory Card is taken out. Step6: The Format is selected with File Mode and an internal memory is formatted. Step7: Please power off once when the format is completed. Step8: When the next power on, it is possible to use it as usuaL.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. OVERVIEW................... ............. ....... ........ ................................ .............. 1-1

1.1 OUTLINE..... ............................. .................................. ........................ 1-1
1.2 FEATURES.................. ...................... ..... ..................... ......... .............. 1-1
1.3 ACCESSORIES.................... ................... ............... ............................ 1 - 3
1.4 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................ l-4

1.5 OPTION ............ ....... ............ ..... ........ ..... ......... .................................... 1-6
1.6 APPLICABLE IC MEMORY CARDS ............................................1-7

1.7 UPDA TING SOFTWARE VERSION .............................................. 1-8
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION .......................................... 2-1

2.1
EXPLANATION OF OPERATING PANELS ................................ 2-1
2.2 2.3
DESCRIPTION OF EACH SECTION ON DISPLAY UNIT ........ 2-5

DESCRIPTION OF INTERFACE ...................................................2-10
2.4 2.5
DESCRIPTION OF HELP FUNCTIONS ....................................... 2-l1
ATTACHING/DETACHING THE LIGHT SOURCE UNIT .......2-12

2.5.1
Detaching the unit........ .................................................. ............... 2- 1 2
2.5.2
2.6
Attaching the unit........... ................ ........ ...................................... 2-12
POWER SUPPLY AND BATTERY OPERATION .......................2-13
3. BASIC MEASUREMENT .......... .......... ........ ...... .......... ...................... 3-1

3 .1 POWER ON ........................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 FIBER CONNECTION ..................................................................... 3-2

3.3 AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENT .................................................... 3-3
3.4 MANUAL MEAS UREMENT .. ......... ........... ............................ .........3-6
3.4.1 Manual measurement 1 ................................................................3-6
3.4.2
3.5
l\lanual measurement 2 ................................................................3-9
AUTO SEARCH FUNCTION.. .............. .................. ........... ......... ..... 3-1 i

3.5.1
Operation procedures ................................................................... 3-11
3.6
AN EXAMPLE OF BASIC MEASUREMENT............................... 3-14

3.6.1
Absolute distance measurement (measurement of 10 Km long optical fiber) ................................ 3-14

Loss measurement (with a 25 Km long fiber)............................. 3-16
3.6.2 3.6.3
Measurement of reflective attenuation ....................................... 3-18
4. HOW TO USE THE UNIT ................................................................. 4-1

4.1
SETTING THE MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS .......................4-1

4.1.1
Measurement .................................................................................4-1
Analysis ... ............ ............. ............................ ........................ ..........4-15
4.1.2 4.1.3
Display........................ ..................................... ...............................4- 2 1

System................................................................................;........... 4- 27
Repeat.................. ........................................................................... 4- 33
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.2
MEASUREl\1ENT .... ........................................ ............ ............ ..........4-40

4.2.1
P revi e,,' ........................................................................................... 4-40
4.2.2
4.3
A veragin g....................................................................................... 4-40
EDITING THE MEASUREMENT RESULTS ............................... 4-43

4.3.1
Marker setup .. ......... ................................... ......... ...................... ....4-43
4.3.2 4.3.3
Label input...... ......... ....... ............................................................... 4-58

COND ITI ONS setup. .................................. .......... .............. ..........4-63
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.4
Auto search of connection point ..................................................4-7 i

D ISPL.A Y .......................... ................................... ..........................4-92
SAVING THE MEASUREMENT DA TA........................................4-1 0 1

4.4.1
Save........................................ ............ ........... ........... .......... ............4-101
4.4.2 4.4.3
Recall...................... .......... ..... ........... ......................... .....................4-107
Copy.............................................................. ......... ................ ........4-114
4.4.4
Delete................................. ............. ........... ..................................... 4-120

Format.... ........... ....... ....... ............................ ... ........................ .... ....4-125
4.4.5
4.4.6
4.4.7
File format................................ ..................................................... 4-133

Printout ....................... ...................... ........................ .....................4-134
4.5
4.5.1
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS .................................................................... 4-137

Fax function (optional) .... ............... ................ ................ ........ ...... 4-138
5. AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENT UNDER REMOTE

OPERATION ...........................................................................................5- 1
5.1
CONNECTION OF RS-232C .CONNECTOR.................................5-1
5.2
5.2.1
MEASUREMENTS UNDER REMOTE OPERATIONS ..............5-1

Control commands and transmission data formats...................5-1
5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3

5.3.1
Delimi ter ....;................................................................................... 5-1
Handling the error commands..................................................... 5-2
PROGRAMMING METHODS FOR THE AUTOMATIC

MEASUREMENTS ... ...... ..... ...... ..................... ... .... ..... .......................5-41
Outline.. ......... ......... .......... ......... ....... .... ....... ...................................5-41
5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6

5.3.7
RS-232C cable connection specification .....................................5-41
Transmittng the commands and receiving the data .................5-42

Outline............................................................................................ 5-42
RS-232C cable connection specification ..................................... 5-43

Transmitting the commands and receiving the data ................. 5-44
Outline............................................................................................ 5-44
5.3.8 5.3.9
RS-232C cable connection specification .....................................5-45

Transmitting the commands and receiving the data ................. 5-45
6. HO'V TO USE THE OPTIONS........................................................
6-1
6.1 HOW TO USE THE MOUSE ........................................................... 6-1

6.1.1 Connecting the mouse...... ........................ .............................. .... ...6-1
6.1.2
Operating the mouse................................................... .................. 6-l

Precautions when using the mouse .............................................. 6-1
HOW TO USE THE KEYBOAR...................................................
6.1.3
6.2
6-3
6.2.1
Connecting the keyboard................... ........... ....................... ........ 6- 3
6.2.2
6.2.3
Operating the keyboard... ........................................... ................. 6- 3

Precautions when using the keyboard ........................................6-4
7. MAINTENANCE AND DAILY INSPECTIONS....................... 7-1

7.1 CLEANING THE MAIN UNIT ..... ............................................. ...... 7-1
7.2 OPTICAL CONNECTOR CLEANING ..........................................7-1
7 .3 BATTERY REPLACEMENT .................................. .........................7-4

7.4 FUSE REPLACEMENT....... ............................................... .............. 7-5
7.5 TROUBLESHOOTING ................. ....... .............................................7-6
Attachment TERMINOLOGy....... ............................................ ............... A-l
1. OVERVIEW
1. OVERVIEW
CAUTION
Carefully read the "PRECAUTION" prior to this chapter before operating the unit.
1.1 OUTLINE
The AQ7220 Mini-OTDR sends optical pulses onto an optical fiber, and detects both the fiber and reflected lights by backscattering lights caused by the Rayleigh scattering of connection points or break points. This AQ7220 meter can detect a failure point from a single end of an optical fiber cable and can efficiently measure the signal transmission loss
and others. The separate optical module design (optional) allows easy system unit
replacement. An appropriate system can be configured according to the measurement wavelength, optical fiber type and other application parameters used.
1.2 FEATURES
The AQ7220 series mini-OTDR offers the following features:
*' Wide dynamic range
31 dB/29 dB (1.3111.55 llm when combined with AQ7225A unit.) 31 dB/31 dB (0.85/1.30 11m when combined with AQ7229A unit.)
* Sampling resolution
50 cm
Small size and lightweight 235 x 340 x 100 mm, approx. 4.6 kg
* Simple operation
Measurement can be performed by merely pressing a single key.

* Three-power supply operation
Battery operation allows the unit to be used in the field.

* Convenient memory feature
Measured data of optical fiber path can be stored in the internal memory, 3.5 inch floppy disc, memory card (to be sold at cost separately) conformed to the PCMCIA 2.0/JEIDA 4.1 or HDD conformed to the PCMCIA (to be sold at cost separately). The data on the memory card can be read on a personal computer using emulation software (sold at cost separately).
1. OVERVIEW
'* Data print-out feature
Printout port for data lists and measured traces is provided.

'* Easy to see screen
This unit employs a 7-inch TFT color LCD, and it also provides the same size monochrome display (as an option).
'* Interface
This unit mounts RS232C, Centronics and PCMCIA (type 2 or tye 3) as standard equipment. Also, it can easily analyze and edit measured data of optical path using VGA, keyboard and mouse connector for external connection without providing a personal computer.
'* Automatic measurement of return loss

With these features, this unit can be widely used to measure fiber cable from subscriber lines to repeater systems, and also it has application from cable installation to maintenance.
1. OVERVIEW
1.3 ACCESSORIES
CD
Main unit
Battery pack x 1 unit
5 c5
00FR V I El
The battery pack is built in the

main unit. CI Protector x 4 units
C) C)
These are removable protectors used to protect the main unit

against mechanical shock.
(1 Shoulder belt x i unit
~ Charger for AQ7220 series (Drawing No. GG-62395-81) x 1 unit

Connection cord x 1
Power cord x 1
Fuse x 4 units (Two of
these fuses are already mounted on the charger.)
rw
~
1-Tl.,_il
~
C Instruction Manual x 1 copy
1. OVERVIEW
1.4 SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications of
this unit are shown in Table 1 - 1 and those of optical units in Table 1 -2.
T able 1 -1
S )peCI 'fiicatlOns
Display unit
7" monochrome display or 7" TFT color LCD (option) Connection loss threshold level setting range: 0.01 to9.99 dB B(O.OldB steps) Return loss threshold level setting range: 20 to 70 dB Automatic setting of measuring range using a single key Automatic measurement of total return loss Distance range 2, 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, l60 km (*)
Automatic measunng feature
Screen
horizontal axis
display
Sampling resolution Reading resolution Number of sampled data Distance measurement accuracy
Setting of group
index of refraction
50cm min.
min. 20,000 points maximum
1 cm
:: (2.0xl0-5xMeasured distance (m) +2 m)
1.00000 to1.99999 and 0.00001 steps
Distance unit tyes
Screen vertical
axis display
Vertical axis scale
km, mile and kf (kilofeet) 0.2dB/div, 0.5dB/div, IdB/div, 2dB/div, 5dB/div

O.OOldB
Reading resolution
Memory Interface
Internal memory and 3.5" floppy disc drive RS232C 9 pin D-sub Centronics 25 pin D-sub VGA monitor 15 pin D-sub Keyboard 6 pin DIN(PS/2 type) Mouse 6 pin DIN(PS/2 type) PCMCIA card slot PCMCIA type 2 slot or tye 3 slot, hard disc card, and memory card (option), etc.
(*) Distance range for AQ7229A (0.85llm) is 2, 5, LO, 20 and 40 km.
1. OVERVIEW
T able 1 -1
S 'fi
Deci ications
ant. (C )
Power supply
AC adapter
Battery pack
100 VAC to 240 VAC
Small-size sealed lead storage battery (LCSA122R3AU manufactured by Panasonic,

Matsushita Electric)
Environmental conditions
Temperature
Working temperature range:

storage temperature range:
o to 4QC,
(or 5 to 40Cforfloppy disk) and

-20 to 50C
Humidity
Dimensions and
85% or less
Approx. 235 X 340 X 100 mm, approx. 4.6 kg
weight
(including the protector)
T a bl 12S )peci 'fi ications 0fOJptica . 1 U nit . eModel name
AQ7225A
AQ7223A 1) I
AQ7229A
Measuring fiber
Wavelength 2)
10/125 pm SM 131 0:t30 nm 1550:t30 nm

31 dB
Event 4)
29 dB
62.5/125 pm
GI
850 nrn
1300 nm:t30 nm
31/31 dB
Dynamic range
Dead zone 3)
5 m (TYP)
Attenuation 5)
25 m (TYP)
Universal type
Optical connector
Class of laser products
(FC, SC, DIN, ST, BICONIC, SMA) Class 1 (llC, FDA, JIS)
1) The AQ7223A is intended for the wavelength of 1310 nm alone. 2) T=25C at 1 f1 s pulse width.
3)
Two types of standards ar~ provided for the dead zone. Refer to the Terminology
attached for the detaiL.
4)
The width of unsaturated fresnel reflection pulse (return loss 40 dB) at the point
1.5 dB less than the peak at 20 ns pulse width.
5)
Input optical plug return loss40 dB at 20 ns pulse width.
i. OVERVIEW
1.5 OPTION
Table 1-3 Optional Units
No.
1
. Option name Battery pack

Charger for AQ7220 (for one charger) Printer
Product name LCS-2312PC (Panasonic) Drawing No. ; GG62395-8 i

DPU-411 TYPE2 (SEIKO),
DPU-412 (SEIKO),
DPU-414(SEIKO), BJ-30V (Canon)

4
5
Printer cable
Hard disc drive
6
7
8
Memory card
Emulation software
Soft carring case

Facsimile modem card (a
set)
Contact us for its information.
The battery pack and chargers of items i and 2 above are included in the main unit as accessones.
1. OVERVIEW
1.6 APPLICABLE IC MEMORY CARDS

This unit is provided with a memory card interface complying with PCMCIA Ver. 2.0 or later or lEIDA Ver. 4.1 or later. For this unit, select a memory card that satisfies the following conditions.
(1) Standard: On and after PCMCIA Ver. 2.0 or later, or lEIDA Ver. 4.1 or later
(2) Memory type: SRAM
(3) Capacity: 256 K bytes, 512 K bytes, 1 M bytes, 2 M bytes, or 4 M bytes
(4) Table 1-4 shows the number of
fies to be stored in memory by memory capacity. this Since the memory capacity differs according to the type of recording format of unit (~Item 4.4.1 (4)), this table shows the number of fies to be stored when the data under same conditions is recorded.
Table 1-4
Memory capacity
(in bytes) 256K
.TRA
5
File recording format .SCR .SET .TIF 250 250 6

500 500 976
1953
13
.BMP
6
13
(17)
512K
1M
11
(35) 22 (69)
45
976
1953
25
51
25
51
2M
4M
(138) 90 (276)
3906
3906
103
103
Note: The. TRA rmv, the upper column indicates number of files the unit can hold
when data size is 20K, and the lower column indicates number of files when
data size is 5K.
1. OVERVIEW
1.7 UPDATING SOFTWAR VERSION

In this system, a new softare can be supplied through a floppy disk to meet requirements of a new unit or for functi.onal enhancement. Refer to the Manual attached to the floppy
disk for the software updating procedure.
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

2.1 EXPLANATION OF OPERATING PANELS
Figures 2-1 through 2-3 show the names and functions of each operating paneL.
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERA TlOi'
CJ
:;
LL
:: a ~
N ""
LL
(\ (\
a -c
I'
/
i=
CJ
.0 OU
~
'-
c:
a
QJ
c ':: a .c
.c
'" vi '-
"" ci
vi
U.. ..
.c '" .c
''"
Q)
a c '"
'"
QJ
QJ CJ
,. '"
c:
D-
a ~
'- ::
O)
"C
.c a '~ QJ ~ a.
'" vi
vi
a .c '- 'a c fLL a

f.c .c
'- '-
~ E a a ~
Q) CJ
.c
'"
E '"
'"
,.
E-
c c a vi I I r- r- '"
SIDE VIW (COVER OPENED STATUS)

o -'
Q)
'-
'Q) (J
c:
'-
c: c:
o
'Q
Cl o
co
(J
"C
Cl Cl
:0
u.
"C
'-
0 i: :0
co
UJ
::
Q)
;t ;:
UJ
ci
en 0-
:I
0
Q)
(J
a:
0 ::
UJ
:=
0.
'-
'0
co
Q)
;t ;:
~
Q)
:;
-0 CJ
Q)
UJ
ci
en
0.
0 0-
CJ
N i N C'
u.
'-
Cl
0
Q)
UJ
;t ;:
Q
co
UJ
ci
en
Li
'Q) -'
0-
c: c:
UJ
..
0.
'- ''-
'-
0
Q
Q)
:0
.. 0
:;
0
0
c: c:
:: ~.. ocr
C'
co Q) co co i: .c Q)
Q)
'-
;t 0 Cl
Q)
0
:=
"C
Q)
Q)
'-0
c:
en
.c
'(J '-
.. U
:: U 0.
(J
c:o :=o
E
Q)
o :r
Cl
(J -'
..
Q 'U 0. co 0 Q
0 ~
c:
co
0.
~ 0
Q)
(J (J .c ~ co Q) 0 (J "0 '- "0 'lJ c: c: -' Q) Q) 0 co c: 0 E 0 'Cl c: :0 Q ''- c: := Cl c: .c 0 c: Q) Cl Q) Q := Q) 0 c: .c 0 (J '- c: '- il Q 0 := '- (J E
Cl
i: .c .i co "C
co
0.
c:
c:
Q)
Q "0
Q)
co
(J
-.
,. 0 '- co
co
''- 0
"C
co
0'-
:=
co
'C
-' c: oU
lJ
'co
.. c:
.c
c: -l
'C
Q)
Q)
::
(J
0.
il 0 .c .c -'~
Q)
Q)
c: C' c: C'
co
.c
0 .c 0 0 Q
U (J
(J '-
Cl Q) c: c:
co
Q)
~ Q 0
.c
il
lJ
Q
Q)
c: Q '-
c.
C'
Q)
il .c
Q)
c: 'c: co
0 .c
OPtical source unit
OP tl ca I connec tor
~ ? ~ ~ ~
A universal oPtical
connec tor usab I e for
various aPPlicatIons.
Stand
Ba t terY hous I ng se t s crews

Wh en m 0 v i n 9 t he batt e r Y
screws I BatterY housing set I
!"
Pack oul. loosen the set

s ere ws us I n 9 a co I n to
When moving the batterY
I I II II
Pro tee tor
Fg2-3 Rear View
remove the bat terY Pack
~ :: ri ~
case. Four screws are
Prov I ded I nc i ud I ng those i ns I de the Pro tee tor.
)0
Pack oul. loosen the set screws using a coin to
remove the ba t terY Pack
case. Four screws are
~ ~
Prov i des I nc I ud I ng those
ins i de the Pro tee tor.
2 (f
"'
o :: o ~
ri
:: )0 ~
o 7.
2.2 DESCRIPTION OF EACH SECTION ON DISPLAY UNIT

Figure 2-4 below describes names and functions of each sections on the display unit.
(29) (31)
(1)
MODE SETUP
(28)
(2 (3
(4)
MENU . . 4 . LABEL
-7 . B09dB
(27)
m;AlNDOIOlB. TRA:
~
DIU
LN)(
.---.,---.------.....---_._---..-----_._.....-.-.._-- .,---------,.---------...,------------,.-----------..----------_.
(32)
-----------..---------..- -----.,----------,.--------- .,--..-------.. ---------..------------,.-----------.,-----------MARKER 2

(26d)
-----------.,---._---~._.__._-..----_._-..- ---- ----------, ---------.,------------,.----------.,-----------(5) (6)
(f
(8 (9
(IIJ
(11) (12) (15) (33) (13) (14) (16) (17) (18) (19)
-------_..,---------,.---------,------..-----_.- -------- .--_......-~---------..-..._.__.~,...-.-_...

----------,-----------,.--------,---------..------- ".----.-----r- --------,--------._._..___________,------------
RPT LSA
FIL
AUT
---------..----------..---------,-----------..-------- ..-.._-.----..-- -----..------------..-----------,----------_.

MORE
20k SF!
REF
, . , , . . . . , I . I I I , . , , , I . , . i i , I I . I . . . . , . , , I . I I I , " 'I' I . I ,. "". I . i ., I , i I . , , I , . I . I . , . . . , , ..", . I I . I " '" , . I ,. ,. I I " " I , , .. I I i . , , I . I . I I , , . . . , . . . . , , , , . , . . I , , . , , , .. . ,.

~ ~ ~(3~. ~ ~ ~ : ~
(2
Display
MARKER 1
(260)
CLEAR
CURSOR
(26c)
(26b)
--:----1 ("'-i"" ~j~. t-"~- - _~(3_ i ----
WAUELENGTH:1.31 ~m SM
PW : 4~s lOR :1.4BOO

'"
(26 a)
ATTEN : O. OdB AUERAGES 65k (2A 16)

ET THE SELECTED MARKER AT TH
(25)
(40
(21J (21)
Fig. 2-4
(23)
(24)
(1) MODE
Displays the selected mode in highlight.
(2) MENU
Displays the selected menu in highlight.
(3) Vertical axis display start level
Displays the vertical axis display start level value (at above the waveform display frame). Displayed value is the internal reference value 48.l60 (dB).
(4 ) Vertical axis scale
Displays the value per division on the vertical axis.

(5) DIY
Displayed when the AVERAGING is used (-- Item 4.1.1).
.. ::
(6) LNK Displayed when the CURSOR LINK is used (~Item 4.3.l).
(7) RPT
Displayed when the
REPEAT mode is used (~Item 4.1.5).
(8) LSA Displays either TP A or LSA approximation being currently selected (~ Item 4.1.2).
(9) FIL
Displayed when the FILTER is used (~Item 4.1.1).

(10) OBO Displayed when the AUTO SETUP is used (~ Item 4.1.1).
(11) 20k
Displays the number of sample data per wavelength (~ Item 4. . ).
(12) SFT
Displayed when the SLOPE FIT is used (~Item 4.3.1).

(13) Cursor distance
Displays the distance from the cursor zero point to the cursor.
(14) Wavelength
Displays the unit measurement fiber tye currently installed. With the unit having
two waveforms, the selected waveform will be shown, too (~ Item lA).
(15) REF
Displayed when using the distance origin change function. (~ Item 4. . ).
(16) Pulse width
Displays width of the optical pulse emitted from the light source (~ Item 4.1.1).
(17) Group reflection factor Displays the value selected as the group reflection factor for the fiber under
measurement. This value is used in the distance calculation.
(18) Attenuator
Displays the amplifier gain adjustment value (~ Item 4.1.1).
( 19) Averaging count time
Displays the number of divisions conducted (-+ Item 4.1.1).

(20) Guidance display
Displays the 'outline explanation (guidance) of operation.
(21) Calculated value between markers 1 and 2
Displays the loss between two points, distance between two points and loss per unit
distance (-+ Item 4.3.1).
(22) Calculated value between markers 2 and 3
Displays the loss between two points, distance between two points and loss per unit distance (-+ Item 4.3.1).
(23) Measurement waveform basic display screen Displays the measurement waveform with both vertical and horizontal axes being set
to the full scale.
The measurement waveform main display screen appears within the frame.
(24) Power indicator Displays remaining voltage level on the built-in battery pack (external power is
included, too). E represents empty and F is fulL.
(25) Software key page

Displays current software key page.
(26a) to (26e) software key function Displays functions of the softare keys.
Available function vary according to the specific mode and menu.

(26 a) key (F5) key/(26 b) key (F4) key/(26 c) key (F3 key)
(26 d) key (F2) key/(26 e) key (Fl) key.
(27) Software level
Displays hierarchy in the operation. Levell: Top level, Level 2: Middle level, Level 3: Bottom leveL.
(28) Date and time
Displays current date and time. Time is displayed in 24-hour format.
(29) Rotary control function
Displays the functions curently executable by the rotary knob (~ Item 4.1.3).
(30) Label
Displays label entered in up to 36 letters.
(31) Horizontal axis waveform display area Indicates the display area in the full scale horizontal axis using the bar.
(32) Vertical axis waveform display area
Indicates the display area in the full scale vertical axis using the bar.
(33) Horizontal axis display star distance Indicates the display start distance on the horizontal axis (left side of the waveform
display frame).
(34) Connection loss
Displays the connection loss.

(35) Reflective attenuation
Displays the reflective attenuation value.

(36) Horizontal axis scale
Displays the value per division on the horizontal axis.
(3 7) Averaging condition During averaging, its progresses is displayed with the bar graph. the averaging or if averaging is stopped, the averaging count Upon completion of performed will be displayed in percentage (~ Item 4.2.2).
(38) Measurement waveform main display screen Displays the waveform under measurement, cursor, markers and division.
(39) Sample resolution Displays the sample resolution.

(40) Indication of mouse
Displays the following characters when using this optional mouse. Click these
characters to use the functions.
ST: Startstop averaging R T: Preview PR: Print
(41) Distance range
Displays the distance range.

(42) Laser warning indication
Blinks the message "Laser in Activation" while the laser is used.
.. "
2.3 DESCRIPTION OF INTERFACE

Following describes variety of
interfaces provided to this unit.
(l) Connector
Connectors given below provide interface per IBM-PC/AT.
(l VGA connector........ Can be connected to display units with the VGA

specifications. Provides display the same as one obtained
on the display unit of
this product.
Cl Printer interface ........ Can be connected to printers with the centronics specifications. (parallel interface) CI Serial port ................. Can be connected to printers with RS-232CS specificaions. It also connects to mouse.
(l Mouse connector ,..... Can be connected to mouse.
CI Keyboard connector. Can be connected to full keyboard. When connected to keyboard, the panel switch is not operative. It must be used with keyboard designed for DOS-V. If used with keyboards intended for other languages, conflict might occur between the display and the unit operation.
Note: Interfaces are standard.

However, equipments connected with them are all optional. Some (mouse driver, for instance) do not have built-in software for driving the
optional equipment.
2.4 DESCRIPTION OF HELP FUNCTIONS

Press the (HELP) key on the unit to display Help screen describing function of each key corresponding to the current screen. Press the c(PREVIOUS PAGE:: or c(NEXT PAGE:: software keys to switch from the
current screen.
Press any key to return to your original screen.

MAY.23.1997 89:29
DISPLAY LEVEL 1
ENCODER ROTATION: Calls the menu.
PAGE
DOWN
PUSH ENCODER : Determines the menu.
MODE Changes the mode.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 Determines Determines Determines Determines Determines the the the the the MARKER menu. LABEL menu. MEASUREMENT menu. AUTO SEARCH menu. DISPLAY menu.
PAGE
UP
AVERAGING Executes averaging_

DISTANCE SCALE No change
PREVIEW Executes the preview function_
dB SCALE Switches to the Trace/Marker mode.
PRINT Prints the current screen.
1/1
--CONTINUE-Figure 2-5 Help Screen
E
iF
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATIOi\
2.5 ATTACHINGIDETACHING THE LIGHT SOURCE UNIT

before this operation. Make sure that the fiber under measurement has been disconnected.
Turn power off
2.5.1 Detaching the unit
(1) Remove the unit by rotating the unit set screw in counterclockwise direction to
loosen it.
(2) Fold the protector on the body top toward outside.
(3) Raise the stand, hold both sides of the unit and pull it gently out of
the body.
~ Q-Figure 2-6 Detaching the Unit
2.5.2 Attaching the unit

(1) Fold the protector on the body top toward outside.
(2) Place the unit gently into the body.
Before placing the unit, make sure that the connectors of the body and unit are matching.
(3) Place the protector on the body top onto the unit. Fasten the unit securely by
rotating the unit set screw in clockwise direction.
2.6 POWER SUPPLY AND BATTERY OPERATION

(1) AC power supply and built-in battery This unit can be operated on AC power supply or on the built-in battery.
(l Operation on AC power supply
This unit can be operated on an AC power supply of 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz.
(a) The attached charger for AQ7220 (referred to as charger) operates this unit and also charges its internal battery pack. Connect this charger to the
main unit using the attached cable. The external power input connector to
connect the charger is located on the left side of the main unit.
(b) Insert the power plug for the attached charger into the AC plug socket.
.. iJ.,~
" ~
- -..".. "
'\ \
\\
\\
\",-\~-.: I /I
" '\ /1
Figure 2-7 Operation on AC Power Supply
Operation on internal battery pack

If no AC supply plug socket is available, this unit can be operated on the internal battery pack.
(2) Battery pack charging
The battery pack can be charged by connecting this charger. When the main unit is not operating, the battery pack is automatically charged up when the charger is
connected.
(3) Check the power LEDs
There are two LEDs that indicate the power status on the main unit and one LED on
the charger.
Main Unit
. (POWER):
. (BATTERY ALARM) :
Charger
(CHARGE):
Comes on when the power switch is turn on. Comes on when the battery capacity decreases.
In this case, switch over to the use of
the charger.
Comes on in the charging status.
CAUTION If connecting/disconnecting of the charger is executed with the power of this unit on, the unit may be reset.
3. BASIC MEASUREMENT
This section describes basic measurement procedures for those who use this unit for the first time.
3.1 POWER ON
(1) Power on
Turn the power switch in clockwise direction (CW) to turn power on.
(2) Contrast control knob
The power switch is also used as the LCD contrast control knob. Rotate the control knob to adjust the contrast. This contrast control knob is effective only for the monochrome LCD. Contrast switch of power switch I-s ineffective for case of color LCD.
(3) Back light
The power switch also functions as the back light switch for LCD. Press it to turn on or off the back light. The back light switch is effective only for the monochrome LCD.
CONTRAST
L2 3,6
4
7
CONTROL
+ I ?VDC
PCMCIA
rQ
(ON) I 0
(OFF) POWER
.76
2 1
CHARGE 1
5 4 3
CHARGE2
GND
5,8
EXTERNAL &
POWER
IN
BACKLIGHT PUSH ON/OFF
Figure 3-1 Power On

( 4) Initial screen The initial screen will appear following power on. While this screen is displayed, the unit performs self-check for proper movement. Wait until the check is finished.
Upon completion of self-check, the trace mode screen will appear.
CAUTION The screen appears approximately 80 seconds after turning the power on.
Several indication wil be shown before the screen appears, but ignore them and wait for the initial screen.
3. BASIC i\lEASURE!\lE:'T
3.2 FIBER CONNECTION

This section describes fiber connection using FC-PC as an example.
(1) Clean the plug tip with wiping paper lightly dipped in absolute alcohoL.
Remove dusts and dins using a sprayer for optical components.
-;
\1 () :
. (2) Insert the plug claw into the connector groove.
~(g
(3) Rotate the plug housing to fasten the plug firmly.
3.3 AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENT

Automatically locates a fault point and displays the averaged waveforms of the fiber under measurement on the screen.
(l) Select the SETUP mode.
SETUP I I
TRACE
FILE
I. SPECIAL I
(2) Select the MEASUREMENT menu (rotate the software key or rotary knob to select the MEASUREMENT).
ANALYSIS DISPLAY
(3) The window will be opened as shown in Figure 3-2.
SYSTEM
REPEA T
(4) Select the AUTO SETUP. Highlight AUTO SETUP using the rotary knob or software key NEXT ITEM. Then press the rotary knob or software key ENTER to open the window for item setup (see Figure 3-1).
(5) Set conditions of AUTO SETUP (the window for next item setup will open.)
APR_25.1997 17:05
REPEAT LEVEL 2
18 km
NEXT
MENU
I~~~ I AUTO -i,." WAVELENGTH I 1.31SETUP 11m SM 1 --m-----r---m-r-------T-------DISTANCE RANGE I 18 km 1 _~----------~-------_-~---~--------
PULSE WIDTH I 500 ns I! i j i

SECTION lOR 1 OFF 1 -imm-----i---------------------i--------TPA
AUT
NEXT
ITEM
lOR I L 479991 .l--------L--------L-------L--------ATTENUATION i 6.25dB 1 i i j

F IL TER 1 OFF 1 +________+__mm__+________+-mm___
AVERAGES 65,536(2"16)1 i i ! i
20k
DATA SIZE r- ---------Tm---------T---m-OPT I CAL PLUG _~--------m~----.-------~m----.-.-~-------mENTER
Distan CLOSE
CONNECTION CHECK I OFF 1 i i i i O. AUG. METHOD I TOTAL 1 Use cursor to the select the knob item
to be changed and
WAVELENGTH: 1.31 11m SM Return Loss: press to enter_
CLOSE
PW : 500 ns Marker 1-2 Ma lOR :1.47999 0.000 dB 0_000 dB
ATTEN : 6.25dB 1_641 km 2.471 km

ELECT THE MEASUREMENT COND I T ION TO BE CHANGED.
1/1
AVERAGES 65k(2"16) O.OOOdB/km O_OOOdB/km
E- iF
Figure 3-2 AUTO SETUP
-: '1
(6) Select the AUTO RANGE (AUT) for the automatic measurement condition. After setting the auto measurement condition at "AUTO RANGE (AUT)", press the rotary knob or the ENTER software key to select it.
(7) Completing the setup.
After setting, rotate the rotary konb to highlight CLOSE and press the software key (CLOSE) to complete the setup.
(8) Starting the averaging.
Press the AVERAGING (START/STOP) on the unit. Distance, pulse width and attenuation will be automatically switched and the averaging is performed in an optimum conditions (see Figure 3-3).
APR.25.1997 17 :08
DISPLAY LEVEL 2
dB/ 15.01
------..----~------------~--- ----~-----------~ ---------.:-- ----------;.--....-------.:---- -_.._--~ -- ---------.:------------
-- --------.,------------,.---- ----.,----------_---------.,----- -------r----------,---- ------,.----------.,- ---------..-_.. -- - - ---1-- ----- -_.. -- r -- --- - -- - -1-"''' -- _.. - -r- .. -- - --- ---1--- -_.. ------r --- _.. ----- -1- ........ -- - -r-'" --- ------1- --- --.. ----
i I i :
I I I I . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I : : : : : : : : i I I I I I : : : : : : :: ':: : : i i I::
i I I i I I I I
I I :
o
20 km
MARKER 1
I I i
MARKER 2
CLEAR
LSA
AUT
CURSOR
5k
MORE
Distance: Splice Loss: WAVELENGTH:1.31 ~m SM Return Loss: dB PW :500 ns Marker 1-2 Marker 2-3
ET THE SELECTED MARKER AT THE CURSOR POSITION.
0.000 2. 026km/ 4m
EXIT
lOR : 1. 48000 dB dB ATTEN : 6.25dB km km AVERAGES 65k (2..16) dB/km dB/km

Figure 3-3 Automatic Measurement
1/3
iF
3. BASIC MEASURE!\Ei\T
(9) Automatic detection
of connection point. Following the above step (8), select and enter the (AUTO SEARCH) in the menu screen using the rotary knob or software key ~AUTO SEARCH:? Calculation processes (see figure below) will be momentarily shO\vn on the screen being followed by display of the data after calculation. The data will be presented
in the form of
the event table (see Figure 3-4).
(Refer to Chapter 3.5 for details of Auto Search function.) * Once selected, the AUTO setup will be executed for every succeeding AVERAGING.
MODE
APR.25.199717:09
DISPLAY LEUEL 2
APR.25.1997 17: 08
ATTEN: 6.25dB
AUERAGE 65,53&
B' SCATTER: -50. OOdB
EUEN T
SPL I CE THRESHOLD: 0.10dB U I EW RETURN LOSS THRESHOLD: 50dB EUENT

END OF FIBER THRESHOLD: 3dB
EUENT
DISTANCE SPLICE RETURN CUMMULATIUE

(km) LOSS (dB) LOSS (dB) LOSS (dB)
PRINT
NO.
dB/km TYPE
LIST
i 5.093 2.480 (36.584 1.681 0.346 R (24.979 7 . 902 o . 340 R 14.945 END
TOTAL SPAN ORL
23. 154
EUENT NOTES
CHANGE
AUTO
SEARCH SETT INGS
EXIT
1/2
E iF
ELECT THE DESIRED AUTO SPLICE FUNCTION.
Figure 3-4 Event Table
ATTENTION: Automatic Measurement is sometimes doesn't work property for measurement fiber conditions.In this case please set the measurement condition by manual operation.
~ .;
3.4 MANUAL MEASUREMENT

3.4.1 Manual measurement 1
In the manual measurement, conditions required for the fiber measurement such as distance and pulse width are selected manually.
(1) Select the (SETUP) mode.
SETUP I TRACE
FILE
I SPECIAL I
(2) Select the menu (MEASUREMENT) (using the rotary knob or software key).
MEASUREMENT . ANALYSIS DISPLAY

(3) The window opens.
SYSTEM
REPEAT
(4) Selecting the AUTO SETUP.

Highlight the AUTO SETU using the rotar knob or software key NEXT ITEM. After highlighting the AUTO SETUP, press the rotary knob or the ENTER software key to open the next window (see Figure 3-5).
(5) Set conditions of AUTO SETUP (the window for next item setup will open).
~
MENU
0.000dB1imANDol
AUTO SETUP
I..
TRACE I
FILE
I SPEC IAL IE): SELECT ITEM

I
APR.25.1997 17:10
I
ANALYSIS LABEL:
DISPLAY
SYSTEM
REPEAT
LEVEL 2
km
~
dB/
LSA
AUT
WAVELENGTH
1.31
I I
DISTANCE RANGE PULSE WIDTH
20 km 500 ns
SECTION lOR
lOR
ATTENUAT ION
I I
1. 480001
6.25dB
FI L TER
AVERAGES
I
65,536(2A16)!
5k
DATA
SIZE
OPTICAL PLUG
CONNECT ION CHECI(
AVG. METHOD
o. Distan
I
TOTAL
CLOSE
WAVELENGTH: 1.31 Ilm SM

PW
to select the item to be changed and Return Loss: press to enter.

Ma. .",. ot-..
II . i , , . . i I I I . i i I i I , i . I i , . . I ' . i , . . ~ ', . , , ,. . . , I , i . I I i . i . . 'I , i . , I , . i I ~ i . , i i i I I I . i I . i . , I i , i i I i i I . , i ~ I , . I I , i . ' I I . , , I , i . I I . ~

Ilm SM
I I I I I
20
NEXT
MENU
-,.-------- - - -..-------- -- -,.------- - ---..----- -.. -----.. -- -- ----- -..---------- - -..--------- - -.,------- -- ---
NEXT
-..-----------.,-----------..-- ---------..-------.;----
ITEM
-..---------T"----------~-------,--..-----,.-----------,-------,.------- ----.,------------
.. po-- -------- -.,-- --- -. -----..--- --- - ----.,- - - ---------
~.. .._-- - ---- -., ----------- r - - -- -___ _ __.,. ____ _ _ _____
ENTER
Use
the cursor knob
CLOSE
:500 ns
: 1.48000
:
Marker 1-2
dB
km
lOR
ATTEN AVERAGES
dB
km
6.25dB
1/1
65k(2~16)
dB/km
dB/km
rsELECT THE MEASUREMENT COND IT ION TO BE CHANGED.
E~F
Figure 3-5 MANUAL SETUP
3. BASIC MEASLJRE\lE!\T
(6) Setting the distance range.
After the setting. highlight (RANGE) by rotating the rotary knob or pressing the software key NEXT ITEM. Then, press the software key ENTER to open the item setting window displaying the distance list as shown in Figure 3-5. Then. highlight selected range and press the ENTER.
AUTO SETUP
WAVELENG TH
D I STANCE RANGE
I 1. 31 ~im SM I ::--rnm2----;~'n----------!
PULSE WIDTH
SECTION lOR
lOR
ATTENUATION
F IL TER
AVERAGES
i 500 ns I : 1B km i
OFF I~ a __moo!
:f : : : a'. IE '. Km , :
I OFF I ,,~ i i
I 1. 480001 ..~ 40 i I 6. 25dB I: 80 nn__!
I I'~ '
'.. 5 km . m____:
. 160 km :
65,536(2"'16)1 i
I OFF I~- CANCEL nm__!
(7) Setup of pulse width.
Highlight the PULSE WIDTH using the rotary knob or the software key NEXT ITEM. Then open the PULSE WIDTH window pressing the rotary knob or software key ENTER. Move cursor to the pulse width you want to highlight. then press the rotary knob or software key ENTER to input your selection.
AUTO SETUP
WAVELENGTH
DISTANCE RANGE
PULSE WIDTH
SECTION lOR
lOR
AT TENUA T ION
(8) Setup of attenuation.
Highlight the A TTENUA TrON using the rotary knob or software key NEXT ITEM. Then open the A TTENUA TrON window using the rotary knob or software key
ENTER. Move the cursor to the attenuation you want to highlight. then press the rotary key or software key ENTER to input your selection.
AUTO SETUP
WAVELENGTH
;~-: I I I I OFF Ii!
1.31 JAm SM I~~-~nm_---__~-~m-.~mninnmnni--
D IS TANCE RANGE
PULSE WIDTH
SECT ION lOR
lOR
A TTENUA T ION
FI L TER
1..o;;IF-~ ~~~~: : : :
I i-480001t i , i !
I 20 km 1M '==~"i4: :
"~i 0 ,
III.
I 500 I rrn 0.00 to 16.25dB q
~ ;r-r-----------:------------r-----------:--I OFF I ;L+mmm-inn-m----~m--nnnin-
(9) Ending the condition setup.
After entering the attenuation, highlight the CLOSE pressing the rotary key or software key CLOSE to complete the condition setup.
(10) Starting the averaging process. Press the AVERAGING (START/STOP) key. This initiates the averaging to display the waveform (see Figure 3-6).
APR.25.1997 17:88
DISPLAY LEVEL 2
~
LSA
-- - - --- - - -..., -- - -- -- - --- PO" -.. - --.. --., -- ---------- r-- ------- -- .,-- - ..-- -_.. -- -,.- ---.. -- - .... -.,- --- .... ---.. po-'" -- _.. -_ _.. .,____.. ______..
-----------i------------r----- - ---l----------r--------------------r--------------- .. -----r---------1------------
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I : : : : : : : : : i I I I I I I I IIIIIIiI
o o
2B km
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
CLEAR
CURSOR
5k
MORE
B. BBB
Distance:
WAVELENGTH: 1.31 ~m SM
PW : 5E1E1 ns
lOR : 1.
Splice Loss: dB Return Loss: dB

Marker 1-2 Marker 2-3
2. E126km/ 4m
EXIT
48E1BEI
ATTEN : 6.25dB
AVERAGES 65k (2A16)
dB dB km km dB/km dB/km
1/3
E
iF
ET THE SELECTED MARKER AT THE CURSOR POS I T ION.
Figure 3-6 Manual Measurement 1
3.4.2 Manual measurement 2
Allows on-the-spot change of conditions such as distance range, pulse width, ATTENUATION etc. to optimum conditions while the waveform is being displayed during the preview operation.
(1) Starting the preview operation.
Set conditions per item 3.4.1 and call the preview display using the (Preview) key.
(2) Call the software function screen for the measurement condition setup.
Press the softare key (CONDITION) to call display of
the software functions as
shown in the figure below.
MARKER
LABEL
CONDITION
DISTANCE RANGE
PLUSE WIDTH
ATTENUATION
MORE
DISPLA Y
EXIT
(3) Changing the measurement conditions.
Press the oeDIST ANCE RANGE:: software key to call window as shown in 3.4.1. Rotate the rotary knob or use c( :: and oe l :: software keys to select "DISTANCE
RANGE".
(4) Finishing the condition setup.
After selecting measurement condition, press the rotary knob or the c(EXIT::
software key to finish the setting.
(5) After completion of setting, PREVIEW operation will be activated with the selected
condition.
(6) Pulse width and ATTENUATION can be changed in the similar procedures.
(7) Furthermore, group reflection factor, filter, averaging count/time, LSA/TP A,
distance unit and wafeform can also be changed by pressing the oeMORE:: software key.
* This approach makes the splice loss measurement and return loss measurement easier since the pulse width change is available in real time even when the waveform enlargement is being in progress.
" 0
APR.25.1997 17: 08
DISPLAY LEVEL 2
~
LSA
___ -_.. -- - -.. ,-- ---- - ---- r---- -- --- ,-- - -_.. ------ r- ------- --- ,--- -_.. -- -- -- r-- --- --.. --..,_.. -- ------
-----------,----------_.,..._--- ----,----- ------,.- - - ---- --,--------- -- -,.-----------,---- --------_.. - - - -- -., -------_.. ---,... -- --.. -_...-., ---- ---- ---,.-- -- --- ---, --- -- -------,.- ---- -_.. -_..., - .... - -.. -_..
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I I I i I I I I I I I I II III I
o o o o
20 km
i
l
2 km 5 km 10 km
a
40 km 80 km 16 km
5k
Distance: Splice Loss: dB WAVELENGTH: 1.31 ~m SM Return Loss: dB PW :500 ns Marker 1-2 Marker 2-3
ET THE SELECTED MARKER AT THE CURSOR POSITION..
0.000 2. 026km/ 4m
EXIT
lOR : 1. 48000 dB dB ATTEN : 6.25dB km km AVERAGES 65k(2A16) dB/km dB/km

Figure 3-7 Manual Measurement 2
1/3
iF
3.5 AUTO SEARCH FUNCTION

Performs the software calculation on the measured waveform to display distance of each the waveform, loss etc. events of
3.5.1 Operation procedures
( 1 ) Executing the auto search.

When the measurement (averaging) is complete, press the
software key AUTO
SEARCH.
(2) The measured data will be calculated automatically. Following display appears
during calculation.
SEARCH in progress!
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
(3) Event table wil be displayed as the operation completes (see Figure 3-8).
APR.25.1997 17:89
DISPLAY LEUEL 2
ATTEN: 6.25dB
AUERAGE 65,536
B' SCATTER: -50. OOdB
APR.25.1997 17:98 SPL I CE THRESHOLD: 8. 18dB

RETURN LOSS THRESHOLD: 58dB
UIEW
EUENT
END OF FIBER THRESHOLD: 3dB

PRINT
EUENT DISTANCE SPLICE RETURN CUMMULATIUE EUENT NO. (km) LOSS(dB) LOSS(dB) LOSS(dB) dB/km TYPE
LIST
1 5.803 2.489 (36.584 1.681 9.346 R

END
14.945
TOTAL SPAN ORL
(24 . 979
7.992
8.348 R
EUENT
23. 154
NOTES
CHANGE
AUTO
SEARCH
SETTINGS
EXIT
1./2
E~F
Event Table
Figure 3-8
(4) Displaying the events.
Press the softare key VIEW EVENT to display above mentioned events to each
point of
the waveform, as shown in Figure 3-9.
(5) Displaying the event information.
Every time the softare key NEXT ITEM is pressed, the cursor and marker positions jump to each event point to show respective event information (such as splice loss distance, return loss, Event No.) to the left of the main waveform display screen.
APR.25.1997 17:28
DISPLAY LEUEL 3
dB/ 15.81
---------.,------------,.--
----m--T------ -- OOj 00 00 1 - ---r.oo-----~mn.-n.-;------mn:oom.-mT-- - ---r-------rm---moo

----- ---- -1-- - --- - --- -- ------.. -1- - -- -- -- -- - - -- ---- ---1--- -_.. --- --.. - ---.. -_.. -- -1- .... -- -.. rOo -------- -1--------.. ---- --- -- ---1--" --- --- ---r-- - -- -----1--.. ---.... ---- r-" ---- -- - - -1-- - -- -_.. ----rOo --- - - - - -- -1-- ---
, , , 0 , " II
, o o o
----~--------------------l------------r-----------i--- ----------------------------
I I I I I I i i I I I I I I I, III.Ii
o o o
28 km
NEXT
EUENT
PR lOR EUENT
i i ! ! ! ! E :
LSA
DELETE EUENT
5k
~:~~t::i~:--j=-:~:~L==~=:~=r~=:~t: ~: dB ---mtmm---ootnn-----t------n--toon
MORE
Distance: Splice Loss: WAUELENGTH: 1.31 ~m SM Return Loss: dB PW :588 ns Marker 1-2 Marker 2-3
8.888 2. 826km/ 4m
EXIT
lOR : 1.48888 dB dB ATTEN : 6.25dB km km AUERAGES 65k (2A16) dB/km dB/km

Figure 3-9 Event Display
1/4
iF
ATTENTION: Auto Search function sometimes can't find measurement connection poits.In this case please use the edit function and fix
the data manually. See Item 4.3.4 (15) for the edit function.
APR.25.1997 17:21
DISPLA~ LEVEL 3
I I I I I I I I I II I I I I i I I I i I I I I I I I i I I I . I I I I I II I IIi I I I : :! : :i : : :E
, o
20 km
NEXT
EVENT
- --- ~--- - - - - - - - - -:-- --- - --- ---~----- - ------:-- - -- --- - - - 4-- -- - -----:---- - - -- - ---~----- - -- ----
-------i------~-------
- - - - - - -----, --- ---- - ---- ~-- -- - - --,-- - -- - -- --- - r' -- -- -------., -- --- ----- - -,. -- ------ -- - .,-- -- - -_ -_ _ ..____ __ _ _ __ _ ,____ _ _ _ _ __ __
_________~--m---m~--- -----i------------~-----m--i------------~------ ----~- ------~:, --------~:------------
PR lOR EUENT
LSA
DELETE EVENT
~~n~r~::~~f=- ~--T-::~:~E-::::l::::=~I-~:=F
5k
isI- : 5 . 003 km j : j
. L . 2 . 480 dB ----+m------i--------+--------+-m
.L (36.584 dB i j i
MORE
0.000 2. 026km/ '1m

Distance: 5.003 km Splice Loss: 2.480dB
WAVELENGTH:1.31 ~m SM Return Loss:(36.584dB
PW :500 ns Marker 1-2 Marker 2-3

ET THE SELECTED MARXER AT THE CURSOR POSITION.
EXIT
ATTEN : 6.25dB 4.845 km 8.273 km
lOR :1.48000 1.681 dB 2.836 dB
1/4
iF
AVERAGES 65k (2A16) 0 .346dB/km . 342dB/km

Figure 3-10 Event Information
l::
3.6 AN EXAMPLE OF BASIC MEASUREMENT

3.6.1 Absolute distance measurement (measurement of 10 Km long optical fiber)
This example measures the distance to the end point of the fiber under measurement.
Conection to the unit
CJ
Fiber under test (10 Km)

Figure 3-11 Absolute Distance Measurement
Far end
(1) Connect a 10 Km long fiber to the unit (see Figure 3-11).
(2) Select the distance of 20 Km in the SETU mode/MEASUREMENT menu.

(3) Select 500 ns for the pulse width.
(4) Set lOR to characteristic factor of the fiber (for example, 1.48000).
(5) Close the MEASUREMENT menu.

(6) Press the AVERAGING (START/STOP).
(7) When the averaging is complete, waveform will be displayed as shown in the
figure 3-12.
(8) Open the MARKER menu from the DISPLAY mode.
Function of the rotary knob is switched to that of the cursor.

(9) Rotate the rotary knob in clockwise direction to move the cursor to the right.
(10) Move the cursor to the end point of the fiber.
(1l) After moving the cursor to the fiber far end point, press the DISTANCE SCALE key
to highlight the distance scale. Scale up the distance scale (horizontal axis scale)
using the rotary knob.

(12) Press the rotary knob.
This will highlight the distance scale space where the cursor is located. Then move
the cursor to the starting and ending portion of the waveform. (13) The distance display in the lower left side of the main waveform display screen shows results for the measurement done on the 10 Km long fiber.
APR.25.199717:22
o , I I . I i : I I : I i ::::: i II I I I I I I
o
DISPLAY LEUEL 2
20 km
MARKER 1
----------1--- ---------r-----------1-- -------- -r--------- : ----- -------:-----------1-- --- -------r-- --------1----------------------,------ ------,.-----------, - --- - -- ---1"---- - --- ------------,.---- -------.,-------- ----po-----------.,------- -----
- - - -- ---- --, -- - - -- -- - ---,.----- ---- --., - - ---- - ---,.- - --- -- - - --., ---- --- ----,.- - --- -- - - - -., - - - - - - - --- - - ,.-- -- ---- -- -..----- -- --- --
-- ---- --- --~ -- - -- - - -- --- ~--------- --.. -- - - -- - - - - - ~- ---- ------ ~ - - - - - -- -- - ~ - - -- -- - - - - -.. - - -- - --- -- -~- - -- --------1-- ------- -
LSA
i i i i i ! ! I I I I I I I I I I , I I I I I I I . II II II I I t
i i I I I I I I I , : : : : : I II I II I i I I I I i I I I . I i I : . I I i I : I I I I
dB dB
MARKER 2
CLEAR
CURSOR
5k
MORE
::::~~:~I~-::~~l~:::=I=:~::F::=::l=~::- : - - - ..
Distance: km Splice Loss:

WAUELENGTH:l.31 ~m SM Return Loss:
8 . 080 km 2 . 026km/ 4m
2-3
dB
km
AUG ' NG 100;;
PW :500 ns Marker 1-2 Marker
EXIT
lOR : 1. 48008 dB ATTEN : 6. 25dB km

Figure 3-12
1/3
E --- F
AUERAGES 65k (2AI6) dB/km

dB/km
Absolute Distance Measurement
,_ i.;
3.6.2 Loss measurement (with a 15 Km long fiber)
This example measures the connection loss and reflective attenuation at the connection point, and the distance to the connection point when multiple fibers are connected using optical connectors.
Conection to the unit
"" Fiber under test(1 0 Km) Fiber under test(5 Km)

Connected by 1-1
Figure 3-13 Transmission Loss Measurement
D/
DID
Far end
(1) Connect two fibers, 10 Km5 Km long, to the unit (Figure 3-13).
(2) Select 20 Km for the distance range in the SETUP mode/MEASUREMENT menu.
(3) Select 500 ns for the pulse width in the above mode.

(5) Press the AVERAGING (START/STOP).
(6) Waveform will be displayed as shown in the figure 3-14.
(7) Open the (MARKER) menu in the DISPLAY mode.
The rotary knob functions will be switched to the cursor.

(8) Rotate the rotary knob in clockwise direction to move into the right.
(9) Move the cursor to the connector connection point.
(10) Press the softare key (MARKR 2). 4 markers will appear around the cursor. (CD, , Y, CI) Press the (MARKER 2) again, and 1 and CI will approach to the
cursor with the cursor at center of
them.
(1 1) Measured data appear between MARKERS land 2 and MARKRS 2 and 3 under the main wafeform display. The splice loss and return loss are displayed to the right of the Distance.
(12) Press the (MARKER 2) software key so that the loss per unit distance between the MARKR 1 and 2 is approximated to that of between 2 and 3.
(13) The splice loss represents the loss measured at the connection point.
(14) The dB between MARKRS I and 2 represents the loss between CD and . The Km between MARKER 1 and 2 refers to the distance between CD and . The
dBIK between MARKERS 1 and 2 refers to the loss per unit distance between CD
and . The same applies to MARKRS 2 and 3. Refer to Item 4.3, the section of
editing the measurement data for further details.
APR.25.199717:35
DISPLAY LEUEL 1
dB/ 15.l
-- - - - - -_. --., -- ---- --- - -- r -- ---- -- - --., -- - -- -- --- r-- -- - --- -- .,-- - - -- --- -- -,.- -------- -.,-- --- -- ---- ,.-- --- -- --- -,-------- ----
---------- -,------------r----- --- --- ,-- - ----- ----r---------- .,------------,.----------.,------- -- -r-----------.,------- -----
LSA
-----------.,-- ----------,.-----------.,-----------..---------- ., ----------- -,.-----------.,------------ ---- --.,---------- -
FIL
5k
----- ------.,-- --------,.-- --- --- ---.,- -- - -- ----r---------- .,------------,.-----------.,-- --------- - ---- ----- -- --- ---., -- ----- -----r--- - - ---- -- ,-- --- - -- ----,.-------- -- .,------------,.-----------,-- --- ------ -,. -- ----
. km 2. 26km/ 4m AUG ' NG 1~

Distance: 9.938 km Splice Loss: .983dB
WAUELENGTH:1.31 ~m SM Return Loss:(35.95dB
III.IIII , , . . i I . I I I I I I i . I I I I I . , . I I I , I I I . I I . I I I i , I I I . I . , i i I i . I I I I I , . I , I I I I I I I . I , . I I i I i I 'I i I . I i I I I I I I I I I I I I . , I I I I I I I I I , . , , , I I I , I . I , . , I , I I I . I I I . I I , , I I I I I . ,,,,..II ,

,
2 km
MARKER
----------- r-----------1--------- -r --------- :----------f----------l---- - - ----f-----------r----------LABEL
COND I -
TIONS
AUTO
SEARCH

ELECT THE TRACE MENU DES IRED.
DISPLAY
lOR : 1. 48 2.69 dB 1.734 dB ATTEN : 6.25dB 8.12 km 5.3 km

AUERAGES 65k(2A16) .331dB/km .346dB/km
Figure 3-l4 Transmission Loss Measurement (with a 25 Km long fiber)
1/1.
iF
~ ,.,
3.6.3 Measurement of reflective attenuation This example measures the reflective attenuation at the connection point when multiple fibers are connected using connectors.
Conectes to the unit
Fiber under test(10 Km) Fiber under test(5 Km)

Figure 3-15 Measurement of reflective attenuation
QJ
Connected by J-J
Far end
(1) Connect two fibers, 10 Km and 5Km long, to the unit using the connector. (Figure
3-15)
(2) Select 20 km for the distance range in the SETUP mode/MEASUREMENT menu.
(3) Select 500 ns for the pulse width.

(5) Press the AVERAGING (START/STOP) key. '
(6) A waveform will appear as shown in Figure 3-16.
(7) Open the (MARR) menu in the DISPLAY mode.
The rotary knob function wil be switched to the cursor.
(8) Rotate the rotary knob to move the cursor to the right.
(9) Move the cursor to the fiber connector connection point.
(10) Press the DISTANCE SCALE and rotate the rotary knob to enlarge the distance scale.
(11) Press the rotary knob to switch the function to the cursor.
(12) Locate the cursor in front of
the connector connection point (Fresnel reflection) and press MARKER 1 software key.
(13) Move the cursor to peak of
the connector connection point (Fresnel reflection) and press MARKER 2 software key.
the screen. For details of
(14) Return loss will be displayed at bottom of
the reflective
attenuation setting, refer to Item 4.3, the section of editing the measurement data.
APR.25.1997 18 :01
DISPLAY LEVEL 2
dB/ 12.01
------ --- --,-- - ---- - - - -- r- - ---- --- -- -,- ---- - -- - --,.- - - - - --- - - -, - - - - -- ----- -,.----- -- - -- -,- --- - --- ----,.- - - --- - _ ---.,- ------ - ----
--- - -- --- --..-- ---- - -- -- -,. - - - ---- -- --., - -- - - - - -- ,.---- -- - --, -- - - -------- ,.-- - ---- - - --,---- - ------ -,.---- --- - -- - .,-- -- - -------
-- ---------1---------- --r --- -------- -------- --r------- ---:------------:------------1------------:------------1------------
LSA
-----------:------------r-------- -- : ------- - --f----------- ------------r-----------l-- ----------r-- ---------1- ---- ------- - - -- --- ---,------ - -- - --,. -- - --- -,-- --- -- - - -,.----- --- - - -, -- - --- ----,.- - -- -- - - - -,- - - ---------,.-- ---------,- --- --- -----
5k
-------- ---, --- ---------,.----------,--- ------ --,.-- -- -------,------------r-----------,----------- -,.----- ------,-- ----------
9.828 40.5 m/ 4m AVG'NG 100~ Distance: Splice Loss: dB WAVELENGTH: 1.31 ~m SM Return Loss: (35. 950dB PW :500 ns Marker 1-2 Marker 2-3
I I I I I I I , i ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! : : : : : : : : : o I I I I I I I I I I I I I , I . I . i I I I I I I I l! ! ! ! i I I I I I I r I I I i I I I I I I I I . : : :: :::: i I I I I 1 I I I I .J I I: I i I I I I : I : I : I i I I I I I I i : : : : : : : : : i I I I I I I i I I i I I I I I I i I
o o o
20 km
MARKER 1
I I I I I I I l I i I I I I I I i I i i I I I I I , I
,
MARKER 2
CLEAR
MARKERS
MORE
EXIT
ATTEN : 6. 25dB 0.045 km km

AVERAGES 65k (2AI6) -21.
lOR : 1. 48000 -9.522 dB dB

367dB/km dB/km
Figure 3-l6
1/3
iF
Measurement of reflective attenuation
CAUTION Depending on the waveform under measurement, this unit may be saturated with the
fresnel reflection. In such case, a correct return loss measurement can't be expected
(measurements tend to be larger the true values).
~ 1 ()
4. HOW TO USE THE UNIT

This chapter describes how to operate the unit and how to perform measurement using it.
4.1 SETTING THE MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

This section describes the SETUP mode to set measurement conditions and environments.
4.1.1 Measurement
The following explains the MEASUREMENT MENU for each measurement condition
setup.
(1) Explanation of screen

,
MODE MENU
TRACE
FlLE
I SPEC IAL I
I
: SELECT I
ITEM
I
APR.25.1997 20:15
REPEAT
1
. ~'I~I..
ANALYSIS
DISPLAY
SYSTEM
LEUEL 2
NEXT
MENU
O.OOBdB imANOol
CD
LABEL:
jttll/J
is
AUTO SETUP
i
CI
C
WAVELENGTH
1.31
I I
DISTANCE RANGE
PULSE WIDTH
(l
CI
5BO
II ' i , i I . . . I I I . . i , . i , I , i .
11m SM I
2B km
SECTION lOR
lOR
I I
1. 4BBOOI
(J
CI CI
QQ QD
~-
ATTENUAT ION
6.25dB
FILTER
AUERAGES
I
65,536 (2A16)1
5k
DATA
SIZE
OPT ICAL PLUG

CONNECTION CHECK
I
O.
AUG. METHOD
TOTAL
Distan
WAUELENG TH : 1.31 11m SM
PW
CLOSE
the cursor knob to select the item to be chanyed and Return Loss: press to enter.
I
i . . . , I , I . i i . i . I , I . I i ~. . i i . i I I I . , . , i , . , I . I I ' . I , i , . I , i I i ~ ' . . . , I . I . , . , . . i i . I , , . . , , . ~ , I I I . i i , . . I . , . , I ~I ,i
20
km
I I
-..--------~----------~---------,-_.-.--..------_.........-------..-----_...--..-------NEXT
ns
ITEM
-..-----------.,------------,.-----------.,----------
-,.-.---------.,-----------..-----------.,----------
-...__._-----~----------..-------_.-..------
...--------~--------..---_.------..--------r----------~-----.-~_l-~--------..--~-~---
Use
;-
ENTER
CLOSE
:500 ns
: 1. 4BOOO
:
Marker 1-2
dB
km
Ma
"'" "'-..
lOR
A !TEN AUERAGES
dB
km
6.25dB 65k(2A16)
1/1
dB/km
dB/km
E -= F
SELECT THE MEASUREMENT CONDITION TO BE CHANGED.
Figure 4-1
MEASUREMENT Screen
(f Attenuation
CD Auto setup
cP Measurement wavelength
CI Filter
CI A veraging count/time
Q) Distance range G) Pulse width

CI Span lOR (index of
(l Data size
reflection)
QJ Optical plug connection check

~ A veraging method
CI lOR
(2) Key functions
(MODE) key:
(F 1 to F5) keys:
(HELP) key: (DISTANCE SCALE) key: (dB SCALE) key: (PREVIEW) key: AVERAGING
Selects the SETUP mode. Available functions are assigned according to the software key menu. Calls the help screen. Invalid. Invalid. Redraws waveforms (--4.2 Measurement).
(START/STOP) key:
(PRIT) key:
Rotary knob:
Starts or stops a measurement. Measurement data currently displayed is lost (--4.2 Measurement). Outputs screen information to the printer. Rotary knob has the different functions depending on
the fuction selected.
t: When "(iSELECT MENU" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select MENU. Press the rotary knob to open the selected MENU.
t: When "(iSELECT ITEM" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to select ITEM. Press the rotary knob to open the selected ITEM.
t: When "(iSELECT FUNCTION" is being

displayed -
Rotate the rotary knob to select FUNCTION. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected FUNCTION.
t: When "(iSELECT VALUE" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select VALUE. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected VALUE.
(3) Setup method
CD AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENT CONDITION ............................. Selects automatic setup of measurement

condition( distance range, pulse width, etc.) among
One Button(OBD), Auto range(AUT), Auto ATT(ATT) and None. ~ WAVELENGTH .......................Selects measurement wavelength. It depends on the optical unit used. CI DISTANCE RANGE................. The range available depends on the unit used. Selects the distance range among 2 km, 5 km,
10 km, 20 km, 40 km, 80 km and 160 km.
(1 PULSE WIDTH......................... Selects pulse width among 20 ns, 100 ns, 500 ns,
1 lls, 4 lls and 10 lls.
CI SPAN IOR.................................Selects Yes or No for setting the lOR at optional interval on the optical fiber under measurement. Reflection) between ( lOR ............................................Sets the lOR (Index of 1.000000 to 1.999999 with a step of 0.00000 l.
(J ATTENUATION.......................Selects attenuation (gain) between 0.00 to

18.75 dB with a step of 1.25 dB.
CI FILTER...................................... Selects fiter. Turns on or off
the filter.
CI AVERAGING COUNT/TIME..Selects averaging count/time between 4096 (1"'12)

and 16777216 (1"'24)/10 seconds to 00.
QQ DATA SIZE...............................Selects data size between 5 K and 20 K.
QD OPTICAL PLUG CONNECTION CHECK...........Selects automatic connection check of optical cable.
~ A VG. METHOD .......................Selects averaging method among TOTAL, DIVISION Normal (normal resolution division averaging), and DIVISION HiRes.
(4) AUTO SETUP
CD Outline An excessive gain can saturate a waveform, while insufficient gain results in
poor SIN ratio. There is an optimum gain value. Usually. specifying a pulse width sets the gain to an optimum value but it is not always true depending on this unit the fiber under measurement. The AUTO SETUP function of provides an optimum gain, distance range and pulse width through its automatic decision process.
CV Setup (a) Press the (MODE) key to select the SETUP mode, and open the MEASUREMENT menu.
(b) Press the ENTER key or the rotar knob to turn ON the AUTO SETUP option.
The following 3 setup methods are available: One-button setup (OBD): Press the (PREVIEW key) for the automatic setup of the distance range,
pulse width and attenuator. Press the (A VERA TING START/STOP) key
to execute avaraging and indicate connection loss list after automatic setup. Auto-distance range (AUT): Press the (PREVIEW) key or the (A VERAGING START/STOP) key to automatically set the distance range, pulse width and attenuation.
Auto-attenuator (AA T):
Press the (PREVIEW) key or the (A VERAGING START/STOP) key to automatically set the attenuation.
CI Operations
(a) Press the (PREVIEW) or (AVERAGING START/STOP) key to start
automatic setup. It usually takes several ten seconds depending on the current fiber conditions.
(b) The Automatic Setup is also executed even when the (CONDITIONS)
softare key is pressed and the distance range or pulse width is changed in
the PREVIEW mode. level close to the near-end dead zone is automatically set to 42 to (c) The signal 44 dB. However, this setup may fail if the fiber conditions are very poor. level setup may exceed this range if the optical connector Also, the signal (or plug) has a large transmission loss and if the signal gain reaches OdB. CAUTION
When AUTO SETUP function used, an optimum setting is not always available as ilustrated in Item CI (c) above.
For attenuation, distance range and pulse width, better setting might be
obtained through manual setup.

(5) How to select the wavelength? CD Outline
The wavelength can be changed on the following dual-waveform selector units only. The wavelength selection is not supported by other units.
Unit name
AQ7225A AQ7229A
Wavelength
1.31 / 1.55 llm
0.85 / 1.31 llm
CV Setup (a) Press the (MODE) key to select the SETUP mode. Then, select and open the MEASUREMENT menu by pressing the rotary knob or
c(MEASUREMENT:: software key.
(b) Select the WAVELENGTH option, and select the desired wavelength on the screen by pressing the rotary knob or c(ENTER:: software key.
(6) How to select the distance range? CD Outline Select the distance range of the following units within the limit. The distance range must always be longer than the fiber length under test. If not, incorrect waveforms may be displayed. To close up the waveforms, increase the
distance scale but do not change the distance range.
(2 Setup
(a) Press the (MODE) key to select the SETUP mode. Then, select and open the MEASUREMENT menu by pressing the rotary knob or .:MEASUREMENT;: softare key.
(b) Select the RANGE option, and select the desired distance range on the screen by pressing the rotary knob or c(ENTER:: software key.
CI Setup range
The following lists the setup range available to each unit.
Distance range (km)

Unit name
AQ7225A AQ7223A
AQ7229A(0.85 llm)
2
5
10
20
40
80
160
AQ7229A(1.30 Jlm)
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0
X
0 0
X
(7) How to select the pulse width? CD Outline When the distance range is set, an appropriate pulse width is set automatically. The following pulse width characteristics must be considered:
. Narrow pulse width:
The distance resolution is high but the dynamic range is limited.

. Wide pulse width:
The distance resolution is low but the dynamic range is wide.

(2 Setup
(a) Press the (MODE) key to select the SETUP mode. Then, select and open the MEASUREMENT menu by pressing the rotary knob or .:MEASUREMENT;: softare key.
(b) Select the PULSE WIDTH option, and select the desired pulse width on the screen by pressing the rotary knob or c(ENTER:: software key.
Q) Setup range
The following lists the setup range available to each unit.
Pulse width (sec)
Unit name
AQ7225A
20 ns
100 ns
500 ns
1 lls
4 lls
5 lls
10 lls
AQ7223A
AQ7229A
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
Reflection)?
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
(8) How to select an lOR (Index of
CD Outline The instrument uses the OTDR method to determine the distance as follows: L = 1/2(N-l CT) (meters) where, L is the distance (in meters), N is the lOR of optical fiber, C is the speed oflight (in meters/sec), and T is the sampling rate (in sec). This indicates that an inaccurate lOR causes an error in distance measurement. CV Setup (a) Press the (MODE) key to select the SETUP mode. Then, select and open the MEASUREMENT menu by pressing the rotary knob or
-(MEASUREMENT:: software key.
(b) Select the lOR option, and select the desired lOR on the screen by pressing
the rotary knob or c(ENTER:: softare key.
Q) Setup range
The lOR can be set within the range of 1.000000 to 1.999999 at every 0.000001
step.
(9) How to select the attenuation (gain)? CD Outline When a pulse width is set, an appropriate gain is set automatically. The high gain without waveform saturation allows the measurement with better SIN. CV Setup (a) Press the (MODE) key to select the SETUP mode. Then, select and open the MEASUREMENT menu by pressing the rotary knob or
-(MEASUREMENT:: software key.
(b) Select the ATTENUATION option, and select the desired attenuation (or gain) on the screen by pressing the rotary knob or c(ENTER:: software key.
Q) Setup range
The signal attenuation (or gain) can be set within the range of
0.00 to 18.75 dB
at every 1.25 dB step.
(LO) How to use the filter?
CD Outline The signal filtering has the following characteristics depending on the waveform status (such as pulse width):
. Advantage:
The filtering can expand the dynamic range (within 2 dB).

. Disadvantage:
The filtering can drop the waveform resolution. (The waveform angle is rounded, and the adjacent fresnel may fail to
distinguish. )
Turn the filter OFF for the short-distance measurement with the better resolution, but turn the filter ON for the measurement with the wide dynamic range. The filter function can be turned ON or OFF for the waveforms after averaging.
( Setup
(a) Press the (MODE) key to select the SETUP mode. Then, select and open the MEASUREMENT menu by pressing the rotary knob or
c(MEASUREMENT:: software key.
(b) Select the FILTER option, and turn the FILTER ON or OFF by pressing the rotary knob or c(ENTER:: software key.
(11) How to select the average count/time? CD Outline The instrument improves the SIN by averaging the signals in the noise level and displays the waveforms. When the averaging count or time is increased, the sIN is improved. Therefore, the averaging count or time must be set by considering the dynamic range of this instrument and the transmission loss of
fiber under test. It is usually 32.768 (2 /\ 15) to 262,l44 (2 /\ 18)
CV Setup (a) Press the (MODE) key to select the SETUP mode. Then, select and open the MEASUREMENT menu by rotating the rotary knob or
c(MEASUREMENT:: softare key.
(b) Select the AVERAGING COUNT or TIME option, and select the desired averaging count or time from the screen using the rotary knob or ..ENTER)software key.
CI Setup range
The averaging count can be set within the range of 4.096 (2 /\ l2) to l6,777,216 (2 /\ 24) and the time is available within hte range of LO seconds to 00
(12) Data size
CD Outline As a measurement condition, you can select either 5,000 point (5K) or 20.000 point (20K) for the number of sample data.
. Advantage:
If 5,000 point is selected for the data point, volume of data saved will be 4 times larger than when 20,000 point is selected.
. Disadvantage:
The distance resolution, however, will become worse if 5,000 data point is selected than when 20,000 point is selected. Example: When data is saved on 2HD floppy disk (File format: TRA) Waveform file Number of sampling ::100 5000
20000
30
~ Setup
(a) Press the (MODE) key to select the SETUP mode. Then, select and open the MEASUREMENT menu using the rotary knob or software key
c(MEASUREMENT:; .
(b) Data size setup
Select the DATA SIZE option, then using the rotary knob or software key ENTER, select a desired data size.
CI Setup range
5000 points (5K) or 20000 points (20K) are available for the data size.
(13) Connection Auto Check of optical plugs CD Outline The Connection Auto Check function can check the fiber connection between the instrument's optical connector and an optical plug of the fiber under test. This function measures the backscattering light level at the near end point, checks whether it is within the limit or not, and determines the "good",
"acceptable" or unacceptable" leveL.
~ Setup
(a) Press the (MODE) key to select the SETUP mode, and open the MEASUREMENT menu by rotating the rotary knob or by pressing the .cMEASUREMENT:: software key.
(b) Select the OPTICAL PLUG CONNECTION CHECK option, and turn ON
or OFF this option function by pressing the rotary knob or .cENTER:;
software key.
(c) Press the (PREVIEW) key to start the preview operation, or press the
(A VERAGING START/STOP) key to start signal averaging. The current
connection status is shown at the left upper end of the waveform screen for three seconds.
CI Messages
(a) When the fiber connection is "good" "THE OPTICAL PLUG CONNECTION is GOOD"
You can start the measurement.
(b) When the fiber connection is "acceptable" "THE OPTICAL PLUG CONNECTION is NOT SO GOOD. PLUG NOT CONNECTED."
You can start the measurement. We recommend to clean the optical
plug(s) and check the fi~er connection.
(c) When the fiber connection is "unacceptable" "THE OPTICAL PLUG CONNECTION is BAD. PLUG NOT CONNECTED." Clean the optical plug(s) and check the fiber for poor connection. CAUTION
(a) When signal averaging is started in the preview operation mode, the detection information and the message are not displayed even if the Connection Auto Check function has been turned on.
(b) Precaution on the operation.
Acceptabilty of optical plugs' connection auto check function is determined by measuring backscattering light level at near end.
However, double check is required because search error can result
depending on the condition of optical fiber.
(14) Averaging methods
CD Outline There are three averaging methods of waveforms as explained below.

(a) Total averaging
It averages the entire waveform currently on the screen. Up to 18 dB of
dynamic range can be handled on a single screen display.

This approach, therefore, should be used when the unit has suffcient
dynamic range.
APR.25.1997 28:27
DISPLAY LEUEL 2
~
LSA
.- ,------ ---- --,. ------ -- - --,-_.. ----- ----,.----- ---- - .,-- ---- - --- ,.----------- .,------- -----,.- -- - - --- -- -, -_.._.. _.... --_..
------ -- - - -,------ --- --r--- ----,----.. ------ -r--------- ,-- ---- --- -- i ---------,------- ----- r----- ------,- - - -- -- -----
I I I I . i I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I I I I
m------rm---m------------i----------- _m_. --------- --------i----------fm-------i----------------------m----f---------i----------f-------------- , -------T-----m--f------ ---im--------
i , ! !
II II II II II II II I
88 km
MAR)(ER 1
, , , ,
MAR)(ER 2
CLEAR
CURSOR
28k
=~~~=F~~~:~:~:~+==:=~=:=F~=f: ::~ ~~:F~l --r =--:~ --------u-im----u--f----------r--------r----mrm--------f---- --= -- ____rm__ m

IL 888
MORE
8. 182km/ 4m
AUG' NG 18m:
Distance:
WAUELENGTH: 1. 31 ~m SM
ATTEN : 7.58dB
AUERAGES 65k (2A16)
PW 4 ~s lOR : 1.48888
EXIT
1/3
iF
ET THE SELECTED MAR)(ER AT THE CURSOR POS I T ION.
Figure 4-2 Total Averaging

(b) Division-Normal averaging (Normal averaging)
A verages the waveforms by separating them into several averaging ranges and by increasing the gain during averaging. This allows to check the
wafeform up to the limit of the unit dynamic range on a single screen. As
the fresnel reflection is divided and averaged separately, the measurement

range of lOR can be increased. Unlike the high resolution averaging, this
method shows the noise level at the connection point.

(c) Division-High Resolution averaging (High resolution averaging)
Averages the waveforms in the high accuracy, and provides the smooth waveforms at the connection point. However, it takes a longer measurement time than the Division-Normal averaging.
(2 Setup
(a) Press the (MODE) key to select the SETUP mode. Then, select and open the MEASURMENT menu by pressing the rotary knob or c(MEASURMENT:: software key.
(b) Select the A VG. METHOD option, and set the desired averaging method by pressing the rotary knob or -cENTER:: software key.
APR.25.1997 20:30
DISPLAY LEUEL 2
dB/ 15.01
~..,------------~.._------,------------r--------.,-----.-----~-----------.,------------,.-----------.,------------ -- --- -----,.. -- -------- ~---- .. -- .,----_.. -- ---~---- -..--_.. ,--- ----- _..,. --------- .,-- -_.. --- --- .,. - - --- ---_.. -,_.. --...... --_....
--------- --.,-----..-----,.--------,------------,.-- ----- --- -------- ---------.,------------,.-- --------- .,-- ----------
DIU
--- --- -- ---,---- --------,. -- -- ---- --,--- - - - -- --- -r- - - - - - -- ---.. -- ---- --- - - - -- - - - - -- -..- - - - ---- -- r--------- -..-- - - - ---- --
LSA
-----------..------------r----------..-----------r----------..----------r- -------..-----------r-------- ---.,---------------------..----------r---------..------------r-----------..-----------r- - - ---..------------r-----------..------- -----
20k
-----------..------------r-----------..------------r-----------..-----------,.- - -..- ---- - --------- ..------------
0.000
I I I I I I I I I i I . I I I I I , I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I I , I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I , i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I , I I I I I
,
80 km
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
CLEAR
CURSOR
MORE
Distance:
WAUELENGTH: 1.31 ~m SM
PW : 4 ~s

8. lO2km/ 4m
AUG 'NG 100:
EXIT
lOR : 1. 48000
ATTEN : O.OOdB AUERAGES 65k(2A16)

Figure 4-3
1/3
iF
Division - Normal Averaging
APR.25.1997 20:29
dB/ 15.01
---~---_..----~-----------.l--_..---_...._..~----------~------------~-----------.l------------~-----------.l------------------- ---~------------~-- -----.l------------~--------- - .l------------~ ---------.l-------- -- -- ~-----------.l------- -----
__ - ______ __.l__ ___ __ ___L ___ __ ______ .l___ __ _______,._ ______ 1__.. _.... ___ ___L ______ ___.l _.. __ ________L _ _ __ ______.l_ ____ _______
DIU
______ ___ _.l __ - __ - __ ___L __.. __ ______.l__ ___ ______.. L_ - __ __ ___ __ .l__ - - - _____ I ___ __.. __ _.. ___ ____ ___ _ ~ _ _ _ _ _ ______..__ __ _ _. .._...
LSA
.....----- -~----------~-----------~---..----.---~-..---------~------------~- --------~------------~--------- --~------------ CURSO R
-----------,--------r------------,------------r------------ .,------ ------r-- - - ---.,- ------- ---r------------.,- -----------
20k
-----------l---------r-----------i------------~----------i-----.-------r- - i-- - -- - : --- - -- - - _n - MORE

o . BOO
!I I I II i I I I ~
I I III I I I I I I II I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I . I I I I , I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I iI I:: :lI IiI CLEAR i i i I I I I IIIII II .II,

80 km
, , , ,
DISPLAY LEUEL 2
MAR)(ER 1
: : ' : : : : i MAR)(ER 2
8 _ 102km/ 4m
Distance:
PW : 4 ~s
EXIT
ATTEN : O.OOdB AUERAGES 65k (2A16)

Figure 4-4
lOR : 1.48000
1/3
iF
ET THE SELECTED MAR)(ER AT THE CURSOR POSITION.
Division - High Resolution Averaging
(15) Softare key menu
CD When MEASUREMENT is open (LEVEL 2)

NEXT MENU
NEXT ITEM
Selects MENU in the SETUP MODE
Selects ITEM
Invalid
ENTER
CLOSE
Opens ITEM (~~)
Returns to SETUP screen (LEVEL 1)
~ When the ENTER key is pressed (LEVEL 3)
NEXT MENU
NEXT ITEM NEXT CONDITION

ENTER
Selects ITEM (~CI)

Selects CONDITION
Enters CONDITION and returns to LEVEL 2 (~CD) Cancels CONDITION selection and returns to LEVEL 2 (~CD)
CANCEL
CI When setting GROUP REFLECTION FACTOR (LEVEL 3)

NEXT MENU
NEXT ITEM COARSE ADJUST
Selects ITEM (--~)
Selects the high half of value ( --(l)
ENTER
Enter V ALUE and returns to LEVEL 2 ( --Q))
CANCEL
Cancel VALUE setting and returns to LEVEL 2 (--Q))
(l When COARSE ADJUST is pressed (LEVEL 3)

NEXT MENU
NEXT
ITE~
Selects ITEM (--~)

Adjusts low order half of value. (--CI)
Enter VALUE and returns to LEVEL 2 ( --Q))
FINE ADJUST
ENTER
CANCEL
Cancel VALUE setting and returns to LEVEL 2 (--Q))
4.1.2 Analysis
This section explains the Analysis mode to allow each detection level setup and linear approximation setup.
(1) Description of the screen
... MODE . TRACE I-FILE 'ISPECIALl:SELECT ITEM APR.25.199720:34

MENU I
7.610dB IIA1NDOI LABEL: 60 km

RETURN LOSS I 50dB I ----~-------i.-------~-.---.--i-----..
MEASUREMENT DISPLAY I SYSTEM I REPEAT I LEVEL 2

NEXT
MENU
CD
~ (I ~
( (9
~ THRESHOLDS . . . . SPLICE LOSS .llIllril. ----.---r--.-------....-----r-.---...

END OF FIBER ~
DIV
NEXT
ITEM
SLOPE APPROX. METHOD ~ ----r-----------------m--m-------mm BACKSCATTER LEVEL ---t--_______l.m_______t________L_______.
1.31 i.m SM I -50.00dB I
2::_:.~~~_~~~~~~~-~2~:~- ~E:-E=~::==-
j j j ! i
Distance: Ia Splice Los to be changed and
WAVELENGTH:1_31 i.m SM Return Los press to enter.
ENTER
I 0.000 'kml' 'I. . I' to 6 10~1a/ select Use the the cursor item knob '
CLOSE
lOR : 1.46000 dB dB ATTEN : O.OOdB km km AVERAGES: 65k(2A16) dB/km dB/km

PW : 4 i.s Marker 1 2 .~. ~~. ~ u
~ELECT THE ANALYSIS CONDITION TO BE CHANGED.
1/1
E~F
Figure 4-5
ANALYSIS Screen
CD Splice loss search level
( Return loss search level CI End of fiber search level

(l Slope approx. method
cI Loss of ( Loss of
the backscattering light on 1.31 llm SM fiber. the backscattering light on 1.55 llm SM fiber.
(2) Setup method
CD SPLICE LOSS ...........................Selects search level for the connection loss between 0.01 and 9.99 dB with the step of 0.01 dB.
CI RETUR LOSS ........................Selects search level for the reflective attenuation

20 and 60 dB with the step of 1 dB.
CI END OF FIBER......................... and 10 dB with the step
Selects search level for the end fiber between 3 of 1 dB.
(1 SLOPE
APPROXIMATION METHOD .................................. Selects slope approximation method between LSA

and TP A.
~ BACKSCATTER LEVEL.........1.31 llm Selects loss value of the backscattering light of 1.3 1 l.m SM fiber at pulse width 1 llm. Value selected will vary according to the optical fiber measured. Search level is -64.99 to 10.0 dB with 0.01 dB step.
CI BACKSCATTER LEVEL......... 1.55 llm SM Selects the backscattering light level on the 1.55 llm SM fiber at 1 us pulse width. A value selected vary according to the optical fiber measured. You can specify a pulse width within
-64.99 and -LO.OO dB in 0.01 dB step.
(3) Key functions
(MODE) key:
(Fl to F5) keys:
(HELP) key:
(DISTANCE SCALE) key: (dB SCALE) key: (PREVIEW) key: AVERAGING

(START/STOP) key:
Selects the SETUP mode. Available functions are assigned according to the software key menu. Describes the functions. Invalid. Invalid. Redraws waveforms (~ Item 4.2, Measurement).
Starts or stops a measurement. Measurement data
currently displayed is lost

(~ Item 4.2, Measurement).
(PRINT) key:
Rotary knob:
Outputs screen information to the printer. Rotary knob has different functions depending on the function selected.
1: When "SELECT MENU" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select MENU. Press the rotary knob to open the selected MENU.
1: When "SELECT ITEM" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select ITEM. Press the rotary knob to open the selected ITEM. 1: When "CHANGE V ALDE" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select VALUE. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected VALUE. 1: When "SELECT FUNCTION" is being displayed -Rotate the rotary knob to select FUNCTION. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected FUNCTION.
(4) About backscattering loss
Backscattering loss (backscattering level) is the constant used in optical return loss measurement and the total return loss measurement. It must be set considering the backscattering loss of the optical fiber under measurement. Though the value vary according to the measured optical fiber, following may be used as a guideline.
Type of optical fiber
1.31 llm
Backscattering loss (pulse width um)
SM SM
Approx. 50 dB
Approx. 52 dB Approx. 42 dB
1.55 llm
1.30 llm
GI GI
0.85 llm
Approx. 36 dB
(5) Slope approximation method
LSA and TP A are available as the approximations when calculating a loss.
CD LSA LSA (least square approximatte) approximates a loss between two points with the least squares. Normally, LSA is used. LSA ensures measurement with smaller error since it uses all data present between two measurement points. It reduces individual variations in the setting and provides better measurement reproduction. On the other hand, if unrequired reflection is present or drop of masking occurred, this method tends to produce larger errors since such factors are included in the measurement.
(2 TP A
TP A (two point approximate) defines the loss between two points as the
difference of level between the two points. This loss measurement approach is used when unrequired factors such as reflection is present between two points. Values obtained through this approach might vary substantially from measurement to measurement depending on individual variations in the setting or selected measurement points.
CI Setup
(a) Select the CONDITION SETUP mode using the MODE key, then select and open the ANALYSIS menu using the rotary knob or software key ANALYSIS.
(b) Select a desired approximation method using the rotary knob, then input
using the software key ENTER.
(6) Software key menu
CD When ANALYSIS is open (LEVEL 2)
NEXT MENU
NEXT ITEM
Selects ITEM
Invalid
ENTER
Opens ITEM (--( and CI)
CLOSE
Returns to SETUP screen (LEVEL 1)
( When setting REFLECTIVE ATTENUATION, fiber end and calculation method. (LEVEL 3)
NEXT MENU
NEXT ITEM
Selects ITEM
NEXT CONDITION
ENTER
Selects CONDITION
Enters CONDITION and returns to ANALYSIS screen (LEVEL 2)( --CD) Cancels CONDITION selection and returns to ANAL YSIS screen
(LEVEL 2)( --CD)
CANCEL
CI When setting CONNECTION LOSS and BACKSCA TTERIG LIGHT

LEVEL (LEVEL 3)
NEXT MENU .
NEXT ITEM
COARSE ADJUST
Selects ITEM
Adjusts in every 0.1 dB steps.( --td)
ENTER
Enters V ALUE and returns to ANALYSIS screen (LEVEL 2)( --CD)
CANCEL
Cancel VALUE setting and returns to ANALYSIS screen (LEVEL 2)( --CD)
td When COARSE ADJUST is pressed (LEVEL 3)
NEXT MENU NEXT ITEM

FINE ADJUST
Selects ITEM (--~ and CI)

Adjusts in every 0.01 dB steps. (--td)
ENTER
Enters VALUE and returns to ANALYSIS screen (LEVEL 2)( --CD)

Cancel VALUE setting and returns to ANALYSIS screen (LEVEL 2)( --CD)
CANCEL
4.1.3 Display
This section describes the DISPLAY menu for display parameter setup.
(i) Description of the screen
MODE 'TRACE I FlLE ISPECIAL~ :SELECT ITEM

MENU I MEASUREMENT I ANAL YS is .1 i' SYSTEM I
-7.61adB GlANDOI LABEL:
APR.25.1997 26:39
REPEAT I LEVEL 2
80 km
NEXT
MENU
Q)
M Idtl/J TRACE TYPE ~ CURSOR TYPE I CROSS (+) I

DIU
(S
( (
CI
Q)
CI CI
QD
~n LABEL DISPLAY ~
26k
(l
~ ~
\d
I 6.
I . , . . , , I , . I I . , , I , . . . . , I . I . , , , . I I . , , , . I . , . I , i I . I . , , . , I I I i . , . . , , . . GRID DISPLAY ~ , , I I I I I I . i . I . , I . , I I . i I. I I . , . , . , , , BEEP ~

GHOST MARKER ~
DISTANCE UNITS ~ dB DIGITS I XX.XXX I
DATE/TIME DISPLAY I MMM.DD. YYYY I
_44_~..._____.l..________~_.____.L______.._
..._-..---------.--------,.----_....--...-------..---------,-----------,.----------,----------._--..----------..---------..----------.,----------
NEXT
ITEM
DATE/TIME ~PR.25.1997 26:39 I
-----:.--------..--------:.------_.L---------
AVERAGING TIME I TIMES I ---..---------~-------..-------------WAVEFORM DISPLAY I DECIMATION I --_._---_........_---,---._-..,...._..
FILE NO. DISPLAY ~
ENTER
Use the cursor knob
iDistanl POWER SAVE I 3 min I
o select the i ter
WAVELEI CLOSE
lOR :1.48066 dB ATTEN : 6.00dB km

AVERAGES: 65k(2:16) dB/km
Figure 4-6
PW : -4 I1S narkerT-2
to be changed and press to enter.
CLOSE
i ".. ."" -oJ

dB
km
1/1
dB/km
E -= F
~ELECT THE DISPLAY CONDITION TO BE CHANGED.
DISPLAY Screen
CD Waveform type CV Cursor type

CI Ghost marker
(l Distance unit
(S dB display digits
CI Date/hour display
(j Date/hour setup
CI Display of label CI Display of grd

(l A veraging count/time
QD Wavelength indication method ~ File No. indication

~ Alarm activation
tW Power save
(2) Setting method

CD WAVEFORM TYPE.................
Selects waveform display type between LINE and DOT.
(2 CURSOR TYPE........................Selects cursor display type between CROSS (+)
. and LINE (I.

CI GHOST MARKR.................... Turns on or off the marker used for verifying secondary reflection. Selects a distance unit among km, mile or kf. ( DISTANCE UNITS...................
~ dB DIGITS ................................Selects a dB display digits among XX.XXX,
XX.XX, or XX.x. CI DA TE/TIME DISPLAY ............Selects date and time display style among MMM.DD.YYYY, DD.MMM.YYYY or YYYY.MM.DD (where, M is month, D is day and Y is year).
(J DATE/TIME..............................Sets date and time as shown in the following the label display. (S LABEL ......................................Turns on or off
CI GRI ......................................... Turns on or off the grd display. Selects the averaging count/time display among COUNT, TIME and OFF. (l WAVEFORM INDICATION waveform data among
(l AVERAGING COUNT/TIME.. METHOD ..................................Selects sampling method of
thinning, averaging maximum value, and link line.
~ FILE NO. INDICATION ........... Turns on or off file No. indication

(l ALARM ACTrv ATION ...........Turns on or off
the alarm.
( POWER SA VE..........................Selects the power save time among OFF, 3 min., 10 min. or 20 minutes.
(3) Key functions
(MODE) key:
(F 1 to F5) keys:
Selects the SETUP mode. Available functions are assigned according to the software key menu. Cells the help screen. Invalid. Invalid.
Redraws waveforms (~4.2 Measurement).
(START/STOP) key:
(PRIT) key:
Rotary knob:
currently displayed is lost (~4.2 Measurement). Outputs screen information to the printer. Rotary knob has different functions depending on the function selected. 1: When "~SELECT MENU" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select MENU. Press the rotary knob to open the selected MENU. 1: When "~SELECT ITEM" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select ITEM. Press the rotary knob to open the selected ITEM. 1: When "~SELECT FUNCTION" is displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select FUNCTION. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected FUNCTION. 1: When "~CHANGE VALUE" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select VALUE. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected VALUE.
(4) Setup of ghost cursor
CD Outline You can use the ghost cursor for measuring the secondary reflection.
(2 Setup
(a) Select the SETUP mode using the MODE key, then open the DISPLAY menu using the rotary knob or softare key c(ENTER:;.
(b) Select the ghost marker ON or OFF using the rotary knob, then input your
selection using the rotary knob or software key c(ENTER::.
CI Ghost cursor display screen

Cursor
i
"-
"-
Ghost cursor
~
x
/'
, , ,
2x
.:
. ,
(5) Distance unit setup
CD Outline The distance unit can be switched between "km" (kilometers), "ft" (kilofeet),
and "miles" on the screen.
(2 Setup
(a) Press the (MODE) key to select the SETUP mode. Then, select and open the DISPLAY menu by pressing the rotary knob or c(MEASUREMENT:;
software key.
(b) Select the DISTANCE UNIT option, and set the desired distance unit by pressing the rotary knob or c(ENTER:: software key.
(c) Select the ENTER option by pressing the rotary knob or c(ENTER:: software key. The DISPLAY screen will appear again.
CI Setup range
meter
1 meter
1 feet
1
feet
mile
6.2l3712 x 10-4
1.8939" x 10-4
1
3.280840
1
0.3084
l.609344 x 103
1 mile
5280
.l. HOW TO USE THE PdT
(6) POWER SAVE mode
CD Outline To save the battery discharging, the AQ7220 can be switched to the PO\VER SAVE mode when no key is pressed for the predetermined time period. it can save the power consumption by:
. Turning off the screen display.
. Operating its CPU in the standby mode.
Turn on the POWER SAVE function to save the battery power consumption.
CV Setup (a) Press the (MODE) key to select the SETUP mode. Then. select and open the DISPLAY menu by pressing the rotary knob or ~DISPLA Y:: software
key.
(b) Select the POWER SA VE mode, and open the CONDITION menu by
pressing the rotary knob or c(ENTER:: software key.
(c) Set the desired Power Save start time by using the rotary knob. (d) Select the ENTER option by pressing the rotary knob or c(ENTER::
software key. The OISPLA Y screen will appear again.
~ Setup range
The Power Save start time can be 3 minutes, 10 minutes, or 20 minutes (that is, the instrument enters the Power Save mode when no key is pressed during this
time period). To turn otlthe Power Save function, select the OFF option.
G) Operation
To cancel the Power Save mode and return to the normal operation mode. just press the rotary knob or press any key on the keypad.
CD When OISPLA Y is open (LEVEL 2)

NEXT MENU
NEXT ITEM
Selects ITEM
Invalid
ENTER
Opens ITEM (~CV)
CLOSE
Returns to SETUP screen (LEVEL I)
When the ENTER key is pressed (LEVEL 3)

NEXT MENU NEXT ITEM
NEXT CONDITION
Selects ITEM
Selects CONDITION
ENTER
Enters CONDITION and returns to LEVEL 2 (~Q))

Cancels CONDITION selection and returns to LEVEL 2 (~Q))
CANCEL
(I When setting DATE and TIME (LEVEL 3)
NEXT MENU NEXT ITEM

MOVE CURSOR
Selects ITEM
Selects cursor position.
ENTER
Enters selected ITEM and returns to LEVEL 2 (~Q)) Cancel ITEM setting and returns to LEVEL 2 (~Q))
CANCEL
4.1.4 System
This section describes the SYSTEM MENU for various parameter setup such as PCMCIA card slots, printer, RS-232C interface, lockout and mouse.
MODE 'TRACE I FILE -I SPEC IAL 18: SELECT ITEM

MENU I MEASUREMENT I ANALYS is I DISPLAY
O. BOOB i ii"utl:.ol LABEL:
~ cI ~
CI
Q)
I5 dB/J
PCMCIA1 PCMCIA2
PR INT TYPE
PRINTER PORT OPERATOR LOCKOUT

LOCKOUT CODE
rcon
AUT
(!
MOUSE DOUBLE CLICK
CI
MOUSE MOVE
5k
.._.-------------.-----------------.----_...,---------,--_.----..----_.---..-------------
Distance: km Splice Los to be changed and

WAVELENGTH: 1. 31 ~m SM Return Los press to enter.
o: 'km'I' o: 'I . 2m 02~k to / select item I 8."B" 'i' Use the the cursor knob .
I i . . I I , . . I . . , , I , l i I , I . . , . . . . I . , i I I , . . I I . . . . . . , . I ~ , . I I , , . I I , , . , i= , . I I , , I , I CQ I . . . , CQ I I I I . , , . I i , , . I . . I . I I , I . , I . . I . I I . , , , . I , , I . i ... I.,, I. II. I

I OFF I
--
APR.28..1997 09:59
REPEAT I LEVEL 2
2B km
NEXT
MENU
-----..--------,----_._.....-----------_..._.
NEXT
I SCREEN I ----~---.----,--------_._-..-----------.------
FILE I
-----~-----_._-,---_.-------..-----------,----------,.---------,------------,.----------,---------
ITEM
i.,,II
CLOSE
--.-,.--------,----------,.----------_._......_-_._-,-----_...---..----------_._ENTER
PW :588 ns Marker 1 2 irc~-c-~~ELECT THE S'iTEM COND I T ION TO BE CHANGED.
CLOSE
lOR : 1.48088 dB dB ATTEN : 6.25dB km km AVERAGES: 65k(2A16) dB/km dB/km

Figure 4-7
1/1
E -= F
SYSTEM Screen (1)
CD PCMCIAI state CV PCMCIA2 state CI Printer output direction and output range CV Printer port C Operation lockout
CI Lockout code
(j Mouse double click
CI Mounse move
(2) Key functions
(MODE) key:
(Fl to F5) keys:
Selects the SETUP mode. Available functions are assigned according to the software key menu.
Invalid. Invalid.
(START/STOP) key:
(PRINT) key:
Rotary knob:
currently displayed is lost (~4.2 Measurement). Outputs screen information to the printer. Rotary knob has different functions depending on the function selected. 1: When "(SELECT MENU" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select MENU.
Press the rotary knob to open the selected MENU. 1: When "(SELECT ITEM" is being displayed Rotate the rotar knob to select ITEM.
Press the rotary knob to open the selected ITEM. 1: When "(SELECT VALUE" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to select VALUE. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected VALUE. 1: When "(SELECT FUNCTION" is being
displayed -
Rotate the rotary knob to select FUNCTION. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected FUNCTION.
(3) Setup method
CD PCMCIAI ..................................Selects the PCMCIAI card status as follows: CARD (Uses an IC memory card.) HARD DRIVE (Uses a hard disk drive.) FAX CARD (Uses a fax modem card.) OFF (Does not use the PCMCIA card.)
(2 PCMCIA2..................................Selects the PCMCIA2 card status as follows: CARD (Uses an IC memory card.) HARD DRIVE (Uses a hard disk drive.) FAX CARD (Uses a fax modem card.) OFF (Does not use the PCMCIA card.) Selecting the FAX CARD in the PMCIAI or PMCIA2 setup enables to select a dialing style among the below (this selection is available from the window
screen).
Fax modem card dialing style: Selects the dialing style of
cI PRIT TYPE.............................
the FAX modem among tone, pulse (10 pps) or pulse (20 pps). Selects the printer output direction as follows: HORIZONTAL (Prints the on-screen waveforms in the portrait format.) VERTICAL (Prints the on-screen waveforms in the landscape format.) Also, this can select the print output range as follows: SCREEN (Prints out the entire screen.)
(i PRINTER PORT .......................Selects the printer interface as follows: CENTRONICS, RS-232C and FILE Selects RS-232C at the printer port, and the following items can be set. (They can be selected on the window screen.) BAUD RATE: Select any of the following baud rates:
300,600, 1200,2400,4800,9600 or 19200
DATA BITS Select any of
the following data bits:

5, 6, 7 or 8
PARITY Select any of the following parities:

NONE, ODD or EVEN
STOP BITS Select any of
the following stop bits:

1, 1.5 or 2
the following flows: Xon, Xoff, HARDWARE or None
FLOW Select any of
Selecting CENTRONICS for the printer port enables the following selection from the window screen.
External printer: Selects the external printer among the Epson
(ESC/P), Canon (LIPS), NEC PC (PR-PR), HPGL,

PCL, Post Script, SEIKO (DPU41 1) and SEIKO
(DPU412) . Please select DPU41 1 for DPU414.

(Q OPERA TOR LOCKOUT .......... Turn on or off the lockout.
CI LOCKOUT CODE ....................Set any lockout code in 4 digits. (l MOUSE DOUBLE CLICK .......Set any time interval to recognize mouse double click between 1 and 10 (long and short).
CI MOUSE MOVE ........................Set any mouse moving distance between 1 and lO (long and short).
(4) Note on using PCMCIA

the memory card, or hard disk card etc., is put in the PCMCIA card slot while the this is the case, the unit is on, the PCMCIA may not work properly. If power of
If turn off
the power, and tu it on again while the card is in the slot.
(5) LOCKOUT function CD Outline The LOCKOUT function locks out all measurement. The measurement conditions can be modified only when the lockout code is entered.
(2 Setup
(a) Press the c(SYSTEM~ software key to display the setup options. (b) Locate the cursor onto the "LOCKOUT CODE" option by rotating the rotary knob or by pressing the c(NEXT ITEM:: softare key.
(c) Specify a four-digit lockout code using the rotary knob or c(NEXT CONDITION~ softare key. Write down the specified lockout code on a memo pad and keep it in a safe place.
(d) Enter the lockout code using the rotary knob or by pressing the ..ENTER~
software key.
( e) Shift the cursor onto the "OPERATOR LOCKOUT" option by rotating the rotary knob or by pressing the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key. Then, turn ON this option by pressing the rotary knob or c(ENTER~ software key.
(D Enter the "OPERA TOR LOCKOUT" by rotating the rotary knob or by

pressing the knob or c(ENTER:: software key. Now, all measurement
conditions are locked.
CI Releasing the lockout (a) Press the ..SYSTEM~ software key to display the setup options.
(c) Specify the four-digit lockout code using the rotary knob or c(NEXT CONDITION)- softare key.
(d) Enter the lockout code using the rotary knob or by pressing the c(ENTER)software key.
(e) Shift the cursor onto the "OPERATOR LOCKOUT" option by rotating the rotary knob or by pressing the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key. Then, turn OFF this option by pressing the rotary knob or c(ENTER:: software key.
(f) Shift the cursor onto the "ENTER" option by rotating the rotary knob, and release the OPERA TOR LOCKOUT by pressing the knob or c(ENTER)software key. The measurement lockout has been released. Now, the
measurement conditions can be changed.

CD When SYSTEM is open (LEVEL 2)
NEXT MENU NEXT ITEM
Selects MENU in the SETUP MODE.
Selects ITEM.
Invalid.
ENTER
Opens ITEM. (--~)
CLOSE
Returns to SETUP screen (LEVEL 1).
( When ENTER is pressed(LEVEL 3)

NEXT MENU NEXT ITEM
Selects ITEM.( -.(W)
NEXT CONDITION
ENTER
Selects CONDITION.
Enters CONDITION and returns to

SYSTEM screen (LEVEL 2)( -.CD)
CANCEL
Cancels CONDITION selection and returns to SYSTEM screen (LEVEL 2)( -.CD)
(W When LOCKOUT CODE is set (LEVEL 3)

NEXT MENU NEXT ITEM
CURSOR TO
Selects ITEM.( -.()
Moves the cursor to next digit.
NEXT DIGIT
ENTER
Enters FIGURE and returns to DISPLA Y screen (LEVEL 2)( -.CD) Cancels the setting of FIGURE and returns to DISPLAY screen (LEVEL 2)
( -.CD)
CANCEL
4.1.5 Repeat
This section describes REPEAT menu used for the continuous measurement.
,
MODE
TRACE
FILE
I SPECIAL I:SELECT ITEM

I
MENU I MEASUREMENT I
ANALYSIS
DISPLAY
SYSTEM
-:lll
APR.28.1997 1O:1
LEVEL 2
-"'R/I
o:
.dB m""..ool LABEL:

REPEAT MODE
AUTOMAT IC SETUP
CI
G)
SOURCE DRIVE
DRIVE
DIRECTORY
I
~ "= ~
(I
Qg
QD
LSA
FILE TYPE START FILE STOP FILE

TRACE STORAGE
in~~
DESTN. DRIVE
DIRECTORY
DRIVE
rWAVELE
PW
\
I
FILE TYPE START FILE

PRINT OUT
CLOSE
Qg
OFF
~ ~ C! ~ ~ C!
(D: ) (D: )
Ei
I I
---...---------..-..-_........._._--_.~_.__..._-..----.........-._------..----..__....._........-----..----------..--.---_....,.-----------..-------------..----.---....-.._-------..-----------..---------...
NEXT
I oo I
---......_----..--.._-_......-.._------..---------
-----r---------..--------..---------..---------
.----r---------.------.--..-....~.-.-,.-----.Use
0
i , , , I . . . I I i . , i , , i . I i , , i i i I I i I I . . . i i . I I I i i . . , . I . I i . . . I . I . i i , . . I , , . i . I , . i I , , i i . . . I I , i i, i . .. II
the cursor knob select the item
dB
km
km
NEXT
MENU
ITEM
ENTER
to be changed and press to enter.

Marker 2 3
CLOSE
lOR ATTEN ~VERAGES
: 1. 48O
: :
dB
km
6.25dB
1/1
65k(2"16)
Figure 4-8
dB/km
dB/km
ELECT THE REPEAT
MODE COND IT I ON TO BE CHANGED.
E~F
Repeat Screen
CD Repeat mode CV Automatic setup

CI Source drive
G) Directory
~ File type CI Start file

(J Stop file
CI Trace storage CI Destin. drive

(l Directory
QD File type
~ Start file
~ Printout
(2) Key functions
(MODE) key:
(Fl to F5) keys:
Selects the SETUP mode. Available functions are assigned according to the software key menu.
Cells the help screen.
Invalid. Invalid.
(START/STOP) key:
(PRIT) key:
Rotary knob:
Starts or stops a measurement. Measurement data currently displayed is lost (~4.2 Measurement). Outputs screen information to the printer. Rotary knob has different functions depending on the function selected. t? When "SELECT MENU" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select MENU. Press the rotary knob to open the selected MENU. t? When "SELECT ITEM" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select ITEM. Press the rotary knob to open the selected ITEM. t? When "SELECT FUNCTION" is being displayed - Rotate the rotary knob to select
FUCTION.
Press the rotary knob to enter the selected FUNCTION.
t? When "CHANGE FILE No." is being displayed

- Rotate the rotary knob to select FILE No. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected FILE
No.
(3) Setup method
CD REPEAT MODE ....................... Turns on or off the continuous measurement. the automatic setup of file. CV AUTOMATIC SETUP .............. Turns on or off
CI SOURCE DRNE ......................Selects the drive for a measurement condition file

among: Floppy disk (A:)/Built-in RAM (F:)/PCMCIAI
(C:)/PCMCIA2 (H:). measurement condition file. G) DIRECTORY ............................Selects directory of
~ FILE TYPE
Select file type of measurement condition file between .TRA and .SET. Note: When you want to print data including the list in item QJ above, select. TR4 for the
file type.
( START FILE .............................Selects start file No. of
measurement condition
file.
Note: When you want to print data including the list in item QJ above, all files to be
specifed in items ( and should be

completed with the automatic calculation.
(J STOP FILE ................................Selects stop file No. of measurement condition file.
CI TRACE STORAGE .................:Turns on or off
CI DESTIN. DRNE.......................Selects drive of
the waveform recording. the waveform record file among Floppy disk (A:)/built-in RAM (F:)/PCMCIAl (G:)/PCMCIA2 (H:).
the waveform record file.
(l DIRCTORY ............................Selects directory of Selects file type of
(l FILE TYPE................................
the wave form record file among .TRA, .SCR, .SET, .TIF, .BMP and .LST.
the waveform record file.
QP START FILE .............................Selects start file No. of
Q PRITOUT ...............................Turns on or off
the printer output among: Waveform/list/waveform+list/no print out.
(4) Description of repeat measurement
Repeat measurement refers to the automatic measurement function. There are two approaches as given below: CD Conducts measurement on more than one optical fibers sequentially and continuously by controlling the external optical switch. (2 Conducts repeated measurements on the same optical fiber using different measurement conditions. This function is useful for measuring multiple connection points on an optical fiber by sequentially scaling them up. Note: AQ7220 Mini OTDR does not have the function of continuously measuring more than one optical fibers by controlling the external switch.
CI Concept of repeat measurement

Concept of
repeat measurement is as follows:
Select optical fiber to be measured using the Note i

optical chip
Performs measurement using the conditions Note 2
specified in the measurement condition file
Records and prints the measured waveform
Are measurement done with every required No
conditions?
Yes
Are all necessary optical fibers measured?
No
Note) Functions indicated by Note 1 and 2 are not provided with AQ7220. * Press the AVERAGING (START/STOP) key to cancel the continuous measurement in progress.
(l Setup method
When the repeat mode turned is on or off, repeat measurement itself is also the SETUP mode tuns on or off turned on or off. Turning on or off the the measurement condition file. automatic measurement of When the repeat mode is turned on, measurement will be executed in the order of measurement condition files specified. The optical switch selects optical fibers sequentially starting from its channell. Measurement condition file is set according to the method described in Item 4.l.5 (3). Measurement starts with the conditions recorded in the start file No. up and continuous through the conditions recorded in the end file No. and, this is repeated for all optical fibers. Measured waveforn1s are filed or output to
the printer.
Note: If a measured waveform is output to a file and if anotherfile having

the same file name is already existent, this file (holding the waveform obtained from the continuous measurement) wi/! not be saved.
4. HOW TO LJSE THE l'\IT
CAUTION
In the continuous measurement, the cursor is fixed to the position specified in the measurement condition setup. Thus, the cursor position must be
adj usted as shown below to cope with dispersed waveforms.

cv
. ': . ~ 0. . .. _ . ._
: - . : . . : . ...:-.-.-:..."' ~ - .
'-.
y
'-. -'"
CD When REPEAT is open (LEVEL 2)

NEXT MENU
NEXT ITEM
Selects ITEM.
Invalid
ENTER
Opens ITEM.( ~CV)
CLOSE
Returns to SETUP screen (LEVEL 1).
~ When ENTER is pressed(LEVEL 3)
NEXT MENU
NEXT ITEM
Selects ITEM.( ~CW)
NEXT CONDITION
ENTER
Selects CONDITION.
Enters CONDITION and returns to

REPEAT screen (LEVEL 2).( ~(l)
CANCEL
Cancels CONDITION selection and returns to REPEAT screen (LEVEL 2).
( ~(l)
CW When setting DIRCTRY (LEVEL 3)
NEXT MENU NEXT ITEM
NEXT DIRECTORY
Selects ITEM. (~~ and G))

Selects the directory.
ENTER
Enters DIRECTORY and returns to REPEAT screen (LEVEL 2).(--CD)
CANCEL
Cancels DIRECTORY selection and returns to REPEAT screen
(LEVEL 2).(--(l)
(l When setting START FILE/STOP FILE
(LEVEL 3)
NEXT MENU
NEXT ITEM
Selects ITEM.( ~(2)

Adjusts FILE No. every 1 0 steps.
COARSE ADJUST
(~C5)
Enters FILE No. and returns to REPEAT screen (LEVEL 2).(~Q))
ENTER
CANCEL
Cancels FILE No. selection and returns to REPEAT screen (LEVEL 2).( ~Q))
(5 When COARSE ADJUST is pressed(LEVEL 3)
NEXT MENU
NEXT ITEM
COARSE ADJUST
Selects ITEM.( ~(2)

Adjusts FILE No. in every step.
(~(2)
Enters FILE No. and returns to REPEAT screen (LEVEL 2).( ~Q))
Cancels FILE No. selection and returns to REPEAT screen (LEVEL 2).( ~Q))
ENTER
CANCEL
4.2 MEASUREMENT
This section describes the preview operation and averaging process.
4.2.1 Preview
(1) Description of preview
The preview refers to the state which allows redrawing of
the waveform any time
needed. It is helpful for setting measurement conditions since waveforms
identification can be easily. And, this allows to check the loss during fiber
connection work.
(2) Starting the preview operation
CD Press the (PREVIEW) key. ~ The waveform screen will be called to start the preview.
CI The preview operation can be executed on any screens other than the help
screen.
(3) Stopping the preview operation
CD Press the (PREVIEW) key.
~ The preview operation will be stopped.

(4) Precautions on the operation
The preview operation will be stopped if
the (MODE) key is pressed during the
operation.
(5) Functions available during the preview operation
Except the AUTO SEARCH key in the Trace mode, all software keys are operative during the preview operation.
4.2.2 Averaging
(l) Description of the averaging
This unit searches very minute signals buried in noise using mean of addition for improving the SIN. A veraging refers to the state in which this processing is being executed.
(2) Starting the averaging
CD Press the (A VERAGING START/STOP) key.
~ The waveform screen will be called to start the averaging. CI Except the help screen, the averaging can be executed on every screens.
(3) Screen during averaging
CD As the addition proceeds, the bar graph grows from right to left direction. CI When the set addition time (frequency) is reached, the bar graph will reach to the left end.
CI Then, the bar graph disappears and the addition time (frequency) counted at the end of averaging will be displayed.
G) The above completes the average processing, and the operation is automatically stopped.
APR. 28 .1997 18: 28
DISPLAY LEUEL 2
B8 km
15081
dBI
I I i I I i t I I
MARKER 2
, o
MARKER 1
:=~:~f=:l:~~~====r:~~i:~==I--==E:=i:~:=~:=:~:~~
CLEAR
LSA
CURSOR
5k
MORE
8 . 888
80 182kml
Splice Loss:
Distance:
WAUELENG TH: 1. 31 ~m SM
PW 4 Ils lOR : 1. 4B888

ATTEN :18.88dB
Return Loss: dB
EXIT
AUERAGES 65k (2n 16)
1/3
iF
ET THE SELECTED RKER AT THE CURSOR POSITION.
Figure 4-9 Averaging
(4) Stopping the averaging
CD Press the (AVERAGING START/STOP) key.

(2 The process will be stopped displaying the addition time (frequency) counted at
the end of the operation.

APR.28.1997 18:28
DISPLAY LEUEL 2
~
LSA
--~-- --------~-- ---------~--------~- ----------..-----------~-.._---_.._-..-----------~----------..-------...
---- -_.. ---1---.. ----.. ---i" --- ----1----..- -_.. -- f- ----- -- -- -1----- --.. -- -1 -------1-- - ---.. -- ---f --------- - -1----- -- -----
------------:-----------r-------------r ---------1---------r -------1-----------r-----------"'----------------------~-- --------:.-----------..---------~-----------..------- .. -------..------ ----~------ ---..-----------CLEAR

CURSOR
II I I I I I I : : : : : : : I I I : : i II: .I I :I : I : ! : i i i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I i I
i I I I I I I I
88 km
MARKER 1
I II I I I II I i l I I I I I
, , , o o
MARKER 2
5k
MORE
Distance: Splice Loss:

WAUELENGTH: 1. 31 ~m SM Return Loss: dB
EXIT
8. U12km/
lOR : 1. 48880 dB dB ATTEN : 18.88dB km km AUERAGES 65k (2A16) dB/km dB/km

PW : 4 ~s Marker 1-2 Marker 2-3
ET THE SELECTED RKER AT THE CURSOR POSITION.
1/3
iF
Figure 4- 1 0 Stop Averaging

(5) Restarting on the averaging
CD If averaging has been stopped, press the (AVERAGING START/STOP) key to

restart averaging.
(2 A veraging will restart from the status in which it has been stopped.
4.3 EDITING THE MEASUREMENT RESULTS

This section explains the Trace mode that can edit the measurement results.
4.3.1 Marker setup
This section describes the MARKER MENU to measure the distance between two points, loss, and connection loss. signal
APR.28.1997 10:30
DISPLAY LEVEL 2
~
LSA
: ; 1: i!
-- --- - -- --r-- -- --- - --., - -- ----- - -_. r- --- - --. -- -- ------ ---,.--------- -.,- - - - - - ----,.- ------- ---.,- - -- --- --- --
II, II, II, II i

, , ,
20 km
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
CLEAR
MARKERS
5k
MORE
Distance: Splice Loss: 0.536dB

WAVELENGTH: 1.31 ~m SM Return Loss: (35.
0.000 2. 026km/ 4m
10m:

390dB
EXIT
ATTEN : 6.25dB 8.102 km 5.007 km

AVERAGES 65k(2A16) 0.487dB/km 0.346dB/km
Figure 4-11 MARKER Screen
(2) Key functions
lOR :1.48000 3.949 dB 1.735 dB
1/3
iF
(MODE) key:
(Fl to F5) keys:
Selects the Trace mode.
(HELP) key:
Available functions are assigned according to the software key menu. Calls the Trace mode help window.
(DISTANCE SCALE) key:
Pressing this key once calls the DISTANCE SCALE CORRCTION option for scaling up or down the distance scale. Pressing it twice calls the DISTANCE SHIFT option for moving the waveform along the distance
(horizontal axis) scale in 1 div.
Pressing it three times calls the DISTANCE SHIFT (fast forward) for quickly moving the waveform along
the distance (horizontal axis) scale in 1 div.
(dB SCALE) key:
(PREVIEW) key: (A VERAGING START/STOP) key:

(PRINT) key:
Rotary knob:
These functions are valid only when the waveform screen is turned on. Pressing this key once calls the dB SCALE CORRCTION option for scaling up or down the dB (vertical axis) scale. Pressing it twice calls the dB SHIFT for moving the waveform along the dB (vertical axis) scale in 1 dive. Pressing it three times calls the dB SHIFT (fast forward) for quickly moving the waveform along the dB (vertical axis) scale. These functions are valid only when the waveform screen is turned on. Redraws the wav:-forms (-7 4.2).
Starts or stops current measurement. The currently

displayed measurement data is lost. (-74.2.)
Outputs the on-screen information to the printer. The rotary knob has the different functions depending on the selected function as follows:
-t When"~ SELECT MENU" is being displayedPress the rotary knob to open the selected menu.
-t When"~ CURSOR SHIFf" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the cursor on the
waveform screen every 1 dot.
Press the rotary knob to switch to the "~

CURSOR SHIFf (FAST-FORW ARD)" display. -t When "~ CURSOR SHIFf (FAST11 is being displayedFORW ARD)
Rotate the rotary knob to shift the cursor on the

waveform screen every 115 div.
Press the rotary knob to switch to the " CURSOR SHIFf" display.
't When "(E DISTANCE SCALE CHANGE" is

being displayedRotate the rotar knob to change the distance
scale for screen enlargement or compression.

Press the rotary knob to switch to the "(E
CURSOR SHIFT" display.
't When "(E dB SCALE CHANGE" is being

displayedRotate the rotary knob to change the decibel (dB) scale for enlargement or compression.
't When "(E DISTANCE SHIFf" is being

. displayed-
Rotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform distance (horizontal axis) scale.

't When "(E DISTANCE SHIFf (FAST-
FORWARD)" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform screen every 1 div. on the distance (vertical axis)
scale.
't When "(E dB SHIFT" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform
screen every 1 dot on the decibel (dB) scale.

't When "(E dB SHIFT (FAST-FORWARD)" is
being displayed-
Rotate the rotary knob to shift the waveforr screen every i div. on the decibel (dB) (vertical
axis) scale.
(3) Manual marker setup
CD Locate the cursor onto the desired marker position using the rotary knob.
(2 Press a softare key of the desired marker number.
Marker CD: Press the (MARKER 1 J software key.

Marker (2: Press the (MARKER 2J softare key.
Marker Q:: Press the (MARKER 3J software key. Marker Yl: Press the (MARKR YIJ software key. Marker Y2: Press the (MARKR Y2J software key. Marker Y3: Press the (MARKER Y3J software key.
(4) Marker movement
To move the marker, locate the cursor at the desired position and press the software key of the marker you wish to move.
(5) Marker clear
To clear markers, press the (MARKER CLEARJ key. All markers will be cleared.
(6) Distance measurement to a failure point CD Outline Measure the distance to the 1ailure point on the waveforms using the cursor.
(2 Setup
(a) Shift the cursor to the target point by rotating the rotary knob. The
distance to the current cursor position is shown at the lower left end position of the waveforms screen.
(b) The following shows the distance measurement to the breakpoint if
the
Fresnel reflection has occurred.
APR.28.199710:32
~
LSA
-- - - ---- ---1- --- - -- - -- f ----- -- ---1-- -- -- - - --- - f-- -- ----- -- -- - -- ---- -- -f- - -- - - -- -- -1- - -- -- ----- ------ - - -- -1- -- - - - - --- --
:=:~~~F~~l=~:~F~:~:~=:~~:: -:~:~--~F=~:F::::=:~:::::~::F~=
, ,
-- --- - -- ---.,- - ---- ------ ~-- - ----- - --., - ----.. ----- -r- ---.. ---.. -- -- - -- - - -.. - - - r - - -- - - - -- -.,----- ------ -,. _.. -- - --- ---.. -- -_.. -_.. --....
-_.. --------., -- ---- - -- - --,. -- - - - -- - --, - _.. --- --- - - ro- - -- - ------ --- ---------,.-------- -- -,- --- - -- - -- - -,.- - -- ---.. -- - "1-- -- - -- - ---
5k
-- - ------ --,------ --- ---r-- --------, --- --- ------,.----------- ------------,.-----------.,-- -- --------r----------- -,- -----------
9.435
I,IIIIII I I I I i I i I I I i I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I i I I I , I I I I I i I I I I I I II I I II " I I , I I I I I I i I I I I I I I' I I I II

,
DISPLAY LEVEL 2
20 km
MAR)(ER 1
MAR)(ER 2
CLEAR
CURSOR
MORE
Distance:
WAVELENGTH: 1. 31 ~m SM
PW :500 ns
101.2 m/ 4m
AVG 'NG lEO::
EXIT
ATTEN : 6. 25dB
lOR : 1.48000
AVERAGES 65k (2A16)

Figure 4-12
CI Setup notes
1/3
iF
Distance Measurement to Failure Point
Set the cursor to the position close to the wav form change point (at the end of straight line) as shown. Set the r solution t at is higher than the required one.
Waveforms
Cursor position
Figure 4-l3
Marker Setup
.t. HOW TO USE THE L':\IT
G) Principle of distance measurement The AQ7220 instrument sends optical pulses onto an optical fiber and samples the reflected light at certain time rate. Therefore, the fiber distance can be the optical pulse transmission time is known. The speed of light obtained if (v) in an optical fiber is as follows: v = C/N (meters/sec) where, C is the speed of light in vacuum (meters/sec), and N is the lOR of
optical fiber.
Therefore, distance "L" (in meters) to a point can be calculated by the following equation:
L = il2 (vT) = 1/2 (N-ICT) (meters)
where, T is the sampling rate (in seconds). In addition, the lOR (Index of Reflection) must be set for distance measurement. An incorrect lOR can cause an error in distance measurement.
(7) Distance measurement between two points
CD Outline The distance between two points can be measured by locating the cursor on the
waveforms.
CV Setup
(a Locate the cursor on the measurement start point by rotating the rotary knob.
Then, press the c(MARKER l:: software
key to set the "Marker 1" position.
(b Locate the cursor on the measurement end point by rotating the rotary knob. Then, press the c(MARKR 2:: software key to set the "Marker 2" position. The calculated distance will be shown at the left lower end of the waveforms screen.
(c (This is the distance between the two points.
APR.28.199711:57
DISPLAY LEVEL 2
~
LSA
--- --- -- - --, - -- - -- - -- - -- r -- - --- -- - --., --- ---------~- - --- ---- -- ,--------- --- r- - - -- - ----- .,---- - -- --- -r- ----------.,- -- -- - - - - ---
-- - --- -- ---.,--- -- -- -----,.----------.,------------,.- ----------,-------- ----r-- -- - -- -- --,- - ----------r- --------- -,-------- ------ -- -----__ - ------ --- ,.-- - -- ----- -., -- - -- --- - --,.- - -- - - -- -- ., --- --- - - - - -r -- -- - -- - -- -., - - -- ---- -- r- - -- - ------,-- - - - --- -- --
- - - - - --.,-- ----------,.-----------.,------------,.---------- ----------- -,.-----------.,---- -----,.-----------.,------------
----------- .,------------r ------ -----., -----------..-----------.,------ ------ ---.,--- -----r-----------.,---------------------- .,------------..--- --- -----.,--- -------..-------- --- .,----- ---- -- -,.- --- -------.,- --- - ---r- - ----- - ---.,- -----------
5k
--- --- --- --., --- -- - - -- ---,. -- --- --- --- .,----- ---- -- -..- --- ---- -- -., --- -- ------- r - - -- -- ---- -.,- ------ -- ---- ---- -- - .,---- --- - -- -
o . OOB
I . I i I I I II I I I I I I I I I I I I . I i I , I i I I I , I I I i I i I I I I I I I . I I i I I I I I I i I i I I I I I I I I , i I I i I I I , I , I I I i I I I i I I I . , I . . I I I I I I I I . I I I I I I I iII II I I I I I I I I 'I" I I . I I I . I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I. I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I I . I I . . I I I I i I I I I I . i I I I I I I I I I I I I' I I I. , I I I I I i I I II.,.II I I I i I i I i i I i

2.026km/ 4m
Splice Loss:
2B km
MARKER 1
o o o
MARKER 2
CLEAR
MARKERS
MORE
Distance:
WAUELENGTH: I. 31 ~m SM
PW :500 ns
Return Loss: dB
EXIT
lOR : 1. 480BO
ATTEN : 6. 25dB
AVERAGES 65k (2A16)
4.821 km km
L67B dB dB
1/3
iF
B.346dB/km dB/km
Figure 4-l4 Distance Measurement between Two Points
4. HOW TO USE THE l!\IT
(8) Signal
loss measurement between two points
CD Outline When "Marker 1" and "Marker 2" points are set, the signal transmission loss and the distance between these two points are measured.
~ Setup See the following figure and tables.
Signal
loss "D"( dBJ
Distance "L"(KmJ
ICursor distanc.::
(a) km
: 1. i llm SYL
Splice loss
ORL
(b) dB
\Vavelength
Pulse width
(e) dB
tvlarkers 2 - 3
: i llS
: 1.'l8000
tvlarkers I - 2
lOR
(d)
dB
km
(g) (h)
( iJ
dB
Aiienuation
:3.i5dB
(e)
( f)
kil
dB/kni
A \':raging count/iime : i.0'l8k (2.'20)
dB/km
Item
(a J
Item name Distance from origin to cursor position
Calculation unit
(b J
(c J
(Not displayed) (Not displayed)
( dJ
(e J
( fJ
and ~
Signal loss between points CD and ~ Distance between points CDand ~ Signal loss in the unit distance between points
"D" (dB)
CD
"L" (km) "D/L" (dB/km)
(Not displayed) (Not displayed) (h J (Not displayed) (i J Note: This example uses the distance unit of "km" although the "kiii" (kilometers), "iiiles" or 'ft" can be used.
(gJ
.t. HOW TO USE THE CNIT
(9) Measurement of connection loss (in four-point measurement) CD Outline When markers CD, CV and CI are set, the fiber connection loss, the transmission loss between two points, and the distance between two points can
be measured. Markers Y 1 and Y3 are internally set as Y 1 = CD and Y3= CV and the measured data is calculated.
CV Setup
Set the following figure and tables.
Appro:\imat.: lin.:ar lin.: b.:t\\.:.:n I and ~
Appro:\imat.: lin.:ar lin.: b.:t\\.:t:n Y and ;
L1
(d)
f2 (X) =a2*x+b2
CV
L2
(b)
L2'
(g)
CI
L3
(.:
(h)
xl
x2 xy2
x3
Cursor distanc.::
(a) km
: 1. I
Split:.: loss
(b) dB
\\"av.:kngth
Puis.: width
lOR
l.m SM
ORL
(cl dB
vark.:rs :2 - 3 dB
: Il.S
Markas i - :2
: 1.-18000
(d)
(.: )
( rJ
(g)
(h)
(i )
dB
Aii.:nuation
A \.:raging count/tiii.:
:3.75dB
: I.O-l8k (:2'10)
kii
dB/kii
kii
dB/kii
Item
(a)
(b)
Item name
Calculation unit
Distance from origin to cursor position Connection loss

Reflecting attenuation (Not displayed)
(al - a2).x2 + (bl - b2)
(c)
( d)
Transmission loss between CD and CV

Distance between CD and CV
-a2 (Ix i - x21)
(e)
( fJ
Ixl - x21
(g)
(h)
(i J
Transmission loss in distance unit between CD andCV Transmission loss bet\veen CV and CI excluding the -a2 (lx2 connection loss Distance between CD and CI Ix2 - x3! Transmission loss in distance unit between CV and CI -a2
-al
x31)
Attention: ORL is not calculated by the above marker setup.

F or the calculation of ORL, see the respective section of the attached forms.
(10) Simple marker setup (in four-point measurement) CD Outline When the cursor is set at the connection point and when the ..MARKER 2::
software keyis pressed several times, the markers
can easily be set for
transmission loss measurement.

(2 Setup
(a) Locate the cursor at the connection point using the rotary knob.
(b) Press the c(MARKR 2:; software key to display markers CD, (2, "Y", and CI on the screen. (c) Move markers CD and CI tow.ard marker (2 by repeating to press the
..MARKER 2:: software key. Set markers CD and CI so that the
transmission loss in the distance unit between markers CD and (2 becomes almost the same as the transmission loss in distance unit between markers (2 and CI.
CD
Figure 4-l5
Marker Setup
.t. HOW TO USE THE L:i\\T
(11) Measurement of connection loss (in six-point measurement) CD Outline When markers CD. (2, cr. Y l, Y2 and Y3 are set the connection loss. the transmission loss between two points, and the distance between two points are calcula~d as shown below.
(2 Setup
See the following figure and tables.

CD
A.pproximatt: lint:ar lint: bt:t\\t:t:n I andl:'

f1 (x) =a 1 *x+b 1
L1
Ll'
(dl
Y3
Approximatt: lint:ar lint: b.:i\\t:t:n Y:. and ,0
(2
L2
(bl
L2'
(gl
cr
( t:l
L3
(hl
xl xyl
xy3 x2
xy2
x3
Cursor disianct::
(al km
: 1. 1 .m SM
: I.S
Splict: loss
(bl dB
(c) dB
Markers 2 - 3
Wa\'t:kngth
ORL
Pulse width
lOR
Al1t:nuation
ivlarkers I - 2
: I A8000
(dl
(el
( ri
dB
(gl (hl
(il
dB
kni
:3.75dB
kil
dB/km
A\'t:raging count/time : I.O-l8k (2"20)
dB/km
Item
(a J (b J (c J
Item name Distance from origin to cursor position Connection loss Reflecting attenuation (Not displayed)
Transmission loss between CDand (2
Calculation unit
(al - a2).x2 + (bl - b2)
( dJ
-a2 (Ix I - x21)
= L l - L2
(e J
Distance between CD and (2
Ixl - x21
( fJ
Transmission loss in distance unit between CD and
-al
-a2 (lx2 - x31)
(gJ
(h J
(2 Transmission loss between (2 and cr excluding the

connection loss Distance between CD and cr Transmission loss in distance unit between (2and
= L2' - L3
Ix2 - x31
(i J
cr -a2
Attention: The reflecting attenuation is not calculated by the above marker setup.
F or the calculation of reflecting attenuation, see the respective section of the
attached forms.
(12) Slope Fit function
CD Outline The Slope Fit function is provided for accurate measurement of optical fiber
transmission loss.
(2 Setup
(a) The optical fiber loss (such as splice loss and attenuation loss) is usually measured by locating the cursor on the waveforms. However, when the Slope Fit function is used, the following line is shown between markers. At this time, characters SFT is shown to the left side ofthe screen.
(b) Determine whether this line matches the trace screen image or not for accurate measurement.
APR.28.1997 12:58
DISPLAY LEUEL 2
2El km
fU
~
LSA
---------i--------r---------Tn-------r--------- - m-----r----------in------T---m---im-m-----------"1---------- - ________n_ ----------!- ______nn -- ------ ______n_n____________n_____ ----r-----------
.IIIIII.
405.1 m/ 4m
Splice Loss: El.899dH
Return Loss: (35. 400dE
I I I i I I I I
,
MARKER 3
MARKER Y2
--- ---~ ----------r------ - ___~-mn-------nnu-- n -------r--------T---n--1---m---l--- ____om
INITIALIZE
~-::~:~F~:~:~f~~:~-:~i::::::~:=r=::~:-i~ - --~:~:r:~=~~:r:::I::=:T~---:::::
5k
:::~:~:+=:~:::f~:~=:~i:::::=:~r:::~:~r::::~:f~~~~=F~~~T:::~:+~::::~::
7.916 Distance:
MORE
AUG' NG ioEl~
RETURN
PW :500 ns
ATTEN : 6. 25dH
lOR : 1.48000
El.603 dE El.750 dE
1.823 km 1.831 km
El.330dE/km El.409dE/km
2/3
iF
AUERAGES 65k (2A 16)
ET THE SELECTED MARKER AT THE CURSOR POS I T ION _
Figure 4- 16 If Marker "Y" is NOT Placed in the Correct Position
APR.28.1997 12:59
fU
~
LSA
-----------.,------------r----------.,----- - ------,.----------- - -- ------..-----------.,------------r---------- -.,- ------- --------------.,------------,.-------- ---., ----- - ------,.---- ----- -- -- -- ------r----- ------.,------------,.------- - ---.,- - -- -------m ----~-------- n________:_m___m__rmm_m_ -- -- -m--rmmm--i--m----r---- -----ur-- ------
I I I I i I I I I . . i I I I I I I I I I 'I i I I I I i I I I I , I I II iI 'I II I I II i ,i
, ,
DISPLAY LEVEL 2
2E1 km
MAR)(ER 3
MAR)(ER '12
~~~~~~~~~~I~~__~~~~~~r~~~~~~~~~~~r~~~~~~~~r~~~~~~~_J__ - ~~~~I~~~~~~~~~I~~~~~~~~~ ~r~~ ~~~~~~~~ ~ L~- -~~~~~~
.- -- -------.,------------,.-----------.,------------,.-----------.,----- ------,.----- ------.,------------r-------- ---.,- - - -- --- ----
5k
--- -- ------.,----.------r--- ----- --.,------------r-----------.,----- ------r-----------.,----------- r---- --- ----.,-- ----------
7.916
. , . I I I I I I I I I , . I II II II II II II II II I
I I i I I , I , I I I I r I 1 I I I
,
IN 1 TIA-
LIZE
MORE
4E15.1 m/ 4m
AVG' NG 1E1E1~
Distance:
WAVELENGTH: 1. 31 ~m SM
Splice Loss: E1.987dB

Return Loss: (35. 4E1E1dB
RETURN
PW : 5E1E1 ns
lOR : 1. 48E1E1E1
E1. 6E13 dB E1.622 dB

1.823 km 1.831 km
E1.33E1dB/km E1.339dB/km
ATTEN : 6.25dB
AVERAGES 65k (2A16)
Figure 4-17
(13) Cursor Link function
2/3
iF
If Marker "Y" is Placed in the Correct Position
CD Outline The Cursor Link function is provided to allow easy splice loss correction for accurate measurement. CV Setup (a) When the markers are placed on the measured trace screen during splice loss measurement, it is very difficult to place the markers in the correct position due to poor screen display resolution. When the trace screen is scaled up, it is necessary to adjust the marker positions.
(b) If you turn the Cursor Link on with the cursor at an in accurate position, the cursor and markers will be fixed to the current positions.
(c) Just move the cursor to the desired position, and all markers are replaced accurately and automatically.
(d) Indication of LNK appears on the screen.
APR.2B.1997 13:21
DISPLAY LEUEL 2
~~~I
----.-----4-------..---~--..---..--4----------L-..--..--- .. ----------..--..--..-~_..--..----- -_~--..---..--..-~_--_..----------------t---.-------~---------_i---------.-~---------.. --------~-----------i------------~-----------i------------
---- -------1--- -- - - -----j-- -- -------j------- --- -r ---- ------ -- - -----t-- -- ----- --1--- -- --- - - - - t ----- -- --- -1----- - - -- - --
LSA
--------- --1- -- -- - -- ---i- ------- --1 --- --- --- ---j------- ---. ------- - - --j-- - --- -- ---1 - - - ------- - - j - - ---- -- - --1-- --- - - -----
5k
- - ------- --1-- --- - - - - ---j- ----------1----------- --- --- --- - - -- -------- -j - ----------1------- - -- - - j -- -- ------- -- - -- - -----
---------1------------r-----------1-- ---------r-------- -----------r-- .--------~---------- --r-----------i------------
: i :: :::: : : :: :::: i I . I I I . . ! ! !
, 'I , I I
405.1 m/ 4m AUG' NG 100~
331dB/km 0.343dB/km
. I I I . I I I : : :: :::: i I i I I I I ," i i,"II..

I I I I 'I. i
28 km
i MAR)(ER Yl
! : : ! MARXER Y3
CURSOR
LINK
SLOPE FIT
Distance: Splice Loss: O. 982dB

WAUELENGTH: 1. 31 ~m SM Return Loss: (35. 394dB
PW : 500 ns Marker 1-2 Marker 2-3

AUERAGES 65k(2A16) 8.
RETURN
ATTEN : 6.25dB 1.872 km 1.864 km

lOR :1.48000 8.620 dB 0.641 dB
3/3
iF
Figure 4- 1 8
Before Cursor Link is Used

APR.28.1997 13:22
M ~
LNJ(
---------- -------------------T-------------- - ---T---------i----------------------r---------
-_._._._.- -~-- ----------~-------_.._~--- ------ -~-_.__._---- - ----_._-~-----------~---- -- - - ----~-------_._-.:-------_._--
-------- .--~-..-..------i----------~--.------i- ---------- - --------i-.------__~...- ..------~-..--------J---------___
LSA
------_._..,.._._------..----------.,----------..-----_.- --- -- ..--_._------.,.-....- --- ..--._-------..--_.._-----
5k
-~~~~::::::j:::::::~:::t::::~~~::~:j~~~~:::::t::~:~:::::: ::~::~~~~~~~t~~~~~~:::j::::::: :::~:t::::::~~:::j::~:~~~:::::
i " i.... i . i i:
405.1 ml 4m
Splice Loss: 0_988dB
Return Loss: (35. 4OdB
. . , . I I I 'i I , i I " . I . . : : :: :::: : ! :! ! i :::: , , , I I I. I I I I I I I. ., I I . . i .. i . I. . I I ,

DISPLAY LEUEL 2
28 km i MARKER Yl
: : MARKER Y3
CURSOR
LINK
SLOPE FI T
AUG' NG 10m
RETURN
PW :500 ns
ATTEN : 6.25dB
lOR :1.48000
0.620 dB 0_633 dB 1.872 km 1.864 km

0.331dB/km 0.339dB/km
3/3
iF
AUERAGES 65k(2A16)
Figure 4-19
After Cursor Link is Used
Q) When MARKR is open (LEVEL 2)

MARKER 1
Enters Marker 1.
MARKR 2
CURSOR CLEAR
MORE
Enters Marker 2 (for quick marker setup).
Clears all markers (and the cursor). Opens the next software key menu.
(--~)
EXIT
Returns to TRACE MODE screen (LEVEL 1)
~ When the next softare key is open (LEVEL 2)
MARKR 3
MARKR Y2
INITIAL SETUP
Enters Marker 3.
Enters Marker Y2.

Executes INITIAL SETUP.
MORE
Opens the next software key menu. ( --CI)
RETURN
Returns to the previous software key menu. (--CD)
CI When the next software key is open (LEVEL 2)

MARKER YL
Enters Marker Y 1.
MARKER Y3
Enters Marker Y3.
CIRSOR LINK
SLOPE FIT
Executes CURSOR LINK.

Executes SLOPE FIT..
RETURN
Returns to the previous software key

menu. (--CI)
4.3.2 Label input
This section explains the LABEL MENU to enter character strings in to the measured wafeforms.
The following shows the Label Input screen.

MODE SETUP
LEVEL 2
20 km
INPUT
MODE
~
LNK
----_.---.,-----------
~CDEFGH IJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
--------.,------------------,--._--------
B123456789 mll$::"'&* 0 -=+/0 () \.: ()
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz? . "'; :
LSA
---------,------------
DONE
----..---.,-----------
5k
AQ722 mini -OTDRI
--------".---------AVG . NG 100::
CANCEL
MORE
7.892 km 405.1 m/ '1m

Distance: 9.917 km Splice Loss: 0.988dB
ATTEN : 6.25dB 1.872 km 1.864 km

AVERAGES 65k(2"'16) 0.331dB/km 0.339dB/km
Figure 4-20
lOR :1.48000 0.620 dB 0.633 dB

NTER THE TRACE LABEL. EXTERNAL KEYBOARD : CTRL+F6 FULL KEY INPUT.
1/3
LABEL Screen
CD Label input field. Up to 40 characters can be entered. CZ The cursor indicating the input position CI The cursor indicating the selected character position
(l Label display area
(2) Key functions
(MODE) key:
(Fl to F5) keys:
Selects the Trace mode.

A vailable functions are assigned according to the
software key menu. Calls the label help window. Invalid Invalid
Redraws the waveforms (~4.2).
(START/STOP) key:

displayed measurement data is lost. (~4.2.)
(PRIT) key:
Rotary knob:
Outputs the on-screen information to the printer. The rotary knob has the different function, depending
on the selected function as follows.
* When "~SELECT CHARACTER" is being

displayed. Rotate the rotary knob to select a character. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected character.
(3) Label input procedure
CD Press the (MODE) key to select the Trace mode.

CV Press the c(LABED softwar key, or open the label of
the menu using the
rotary knob.
CI Press the o:INPUT CHARACTER SELECT:: software key to select a character you wish to enter. Every press of the key shift the types of input characters as follows: Alphabet- Hiragana-Symbols/Numbers/Katakana- Kanji- User dictionary
( Select a character you wish to enter using the rotary knob. Press the rotary
knob, and the selected character will be entered and the cursor will be shifted to
the next position. In case of Kanji input, characters can be selected using the
o:TURN PAGE MODE::/o:CHARACTER SELECT MODE;: software keys. c(TURN PAGE MODE;:....Selects characters for each table. c(CHARACTER SELECT MODE;:....Selects characters using the rotary knob. ~ If you have made a mistake during character input, shift the cursor using the
o:~;: or o:+-;: softare key. Then, select the correct character using the rotary
knob, and press the rotary knob. The incorrect character will be erased and the correct character will be entered instead. ( To enter characters in the label, locate the cursor at the desired input position
and press the o:INSER T:: software key. A single character space will be
opened at the cursor position. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected
character.
(f To delete characters from the label, locate the cursor at the desired delete
position and press the c(DELETE:: software key. The character will be deleted
from the cursor position.
( After you have entered the characters, press the c(DONE;: software key. The label will be entered and will be displayed on the screen. CI To clear the entire label from the screen, just press the o:CLEAR:; software key. label characters will be cleared, and the cursor will return to the beginning
All
of the input field.
(4) User dictionary
This function is for storing/reading of label indication used frequently. Up to 100 labels can be stored, so it is useful to register common geographical names, etc.
1. Storing procedure
CD Create a label following normal procedure. CI Select "User dictionary" using the c(INPUT CHARACTER SELECT::
software key.
CI Select a user dictionary No. you wish to store using the rotary knob. G) Press the c(STORE:: software key to execute storing. ( Press the c(RETURN:: software key to finish.
2. Reading procedure
CD Select "User dictionary" using the c(INPUT CHARACTER SELECT;:

software key.
CI Select a user dictionary No. you wish to read using the rotary knob. CI Press the c(READ:: softare key to execute reading. G) Press the c(RETU:: software key to finish. ( The contents of the label can change in the character input screen. In this
case, press the c(ENTER:: software key to enter the labeL.
(5) LABEL software key menu

CD When LABEL is open (LEVEL 2)
INPUT CHARACTER SELECT
Selects type of input character
Invalid.
ENTER
Enters the label input character.
MORE
Opens the next software key menu.
( -CI)
CANCEL
Returns to TRACE MODE screen (LEVEL l).
o When the next softare key is open (LEVEL 2)
-+-
Shifts the cursor to the right in the label

input field.
Shifts the cursor to the left in the label input field.
Invalid.
MORE
(-0)
RETURN

menu. (--CD)
o When the -(NEXT:: software key is open (LEVEL 2).
INSERT
Inserts a space at the cursor position of label input field.

Deletes a character from the cursor
position of label input field.
DELETE
CLEAR
Clears aU
label characters.
Invalid.
RETURN

menu. (--(1)
G) When inputting kanji (LEVEL 2).

Selects type of input character.
TURN PAGE MODE

ENTER
Selects TURN PAGE MODE using the

rotary knob (-()
Enters the input character.
NEXT
(-0)
CANCEL
Returns to the TRACE MODE screen (LEVEL 1).
L I
~ When the c(TURN PAGE MODE:: software key is pressed (LEVEL 2).

CHARACTER SELECT MODE
Selects type of input character.
Selects character using the rotary knob
(-(I).
Enters the input character.
ENTER
NEXT
( -(2)
CANCEL
Returns to TRACE MODE screen (LEVEL 1).
( When using USER DICTIONARY (LEVEL 2).
t l
READ
Displays the next user dictionary contents.

Displays the previous user dictionary contents.
Adds a user dictionary at the cursor position.

Stores characters in the user dictionary.
menu. (~(2)
STORE
RETURN
4.3.3 CONDITIONS setup
This section explains the CONDITIONS MENU to change the measuring conditions and display the measured waveforms.
APR.28.1997 13:27
DISPLAY LEUEL 2
~
LNJ(
-----------.,------------,.-------.--,-----------1'-----------.,------------,.-----------.,-----------,.-----------,------------- -- - --- - -- .,----- - -- - -- -,. - - - - - -- - --., -- ------ ----r - ---- -----,-- ---- ----- - r- --- --- - ---.,- -- - --- - ---- r- -- - - - - - - - -., -- - - - - - ----
I I I . I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I . t I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I . , ! j j j !
, , , . I I I I I i I I I I
I i I I I I
20 km
DISTANCE
RANGE
PULSE
WIDTH
--- - - - -- --- .,-- - ------ - --r - -- -- - -- - -- .,--- - -------- r---- ---
LSA
ATTEN
5k
MORE
WAUELENGTH:1.31 ~m SM Return Loss: dB
lOR : 1. 48000 dB dB ATTEN : 6.25dB km km AUERAGES 65k(2"'16) dB/km dB/km

ELECT THE CONDITION TO BE CHANGED.
Figure 4-21
Distance: Splice Loss: dB PW :500 ns Marker 1-2 Marker 2-3
0.000 2. 026kml 4m
EXIT
1/3
E iF
CONDITIONS Screen
(2) Key functions
(MODE) key:
(Fl to F5) keys:
(HELP) key: (DISTANCE SCALE) key:
Selects the Trace mode. Available functions are assigned according to the software key menu. Calls the condition help window.
Pressing this key once calls the DISTANCE SCALE CORRECTION option for scaling up or down the distance scale. Pressing it twice calls the DISTANCE SHIFT option for moving the waveform screen along the distance
(horizontal axis) scale in 1 dot.
Pressing it three times calls the DISTANCE SHIFT (fast forward) for quickly the waveform screen along
the distance (horizontal axis) scale in 1 div.
(dB SCALE) key:
These functions are valid only when the waveform screen is turned on. Pressing this key once calls the dB SCALE CORRCTION option for scaling up or down the dB (vertical axis) scale. Pressing it twice calls the dB SHIFT for moving the waveform screen along the dB (vertical axis) scale in
1 dot.
Pressing it three times calls the dB SHIFT (fast forward) option for quickly moving the waveform screen along the dB (vertical axis) scale in 1 div. These functions are valid only when the waveform screen is turned on.
(PREVIEW) key: AVERAGING (START/STOP) key:
Redraws the waveforms (~4.2).

displayed measurement data is lost. (~4.2.)
(PRIT) key:
Rotary knob:
Outputs the on-screen information to the printer. The rotary knob has the different functions depending on the selected function as follows: t? When "( SELECT MENU" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to select a menu. Press the rotary knob to open the selected menu.
t? When "( CURSOR SHIFf" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the cursor on the
Press the rotary knob to switch to the "( CURSOR SHIFf (FAST-FORWARD)" display.
1: When"~ CURSOR SHIFf (FAST-
FORWARD)" is being displayedRotate the rotar knob to shift the cursor on the waveform screen every 1/5 div.
Press the rotary knob to switch to the "( CURSOR SHIFf" display. i: When"~ CHANGE VALUE" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to select a setup value. Press the rotary knob to enter the setup value. 1: When"~ SELECT FUNCTION" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to select SETUP. Press the rotary knob to enter it. 1: When"~ DISTANCE SCALE CHANGE" is
-being displayed-
Rotate the rotary knob to change the distance scale for screen enlargement or compression. Press the rotary knob to switch to the "( CURSOR SHIFf" display. i: When"~ dB SCALE CHANGE" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to change the decibel (dB)
scale for enlargement or compression. Press the rotary knob to switch to the "( CURSOR SHIFf" display.
1: When"~ DISTANCE SHIFf" is being

displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform distance (horizontal axis) scale. Press the rotary knob to switch to the "( CURSOR SHIFf" display.
i: When"~ DISTANCE SHIFf (FASTFORW ARD)" is being displayed-
Rotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform screen every 1 div. on the distance (vertical axis)
scale.
Press the rotary knob to switch to the "( CURSOR SHIFf" display.
i: When"~ dB SHIFf" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform screen every 1 dot on the decibel (dB) scale. Press the rotary knob to switch to the "( CURSOR SHIFf" display.
t When "(q dB SHIFT (FAST-FORWARD)" is

being displayed-
Rotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform screen every 1 div. on the decibel (dB) (vertical
axis) scale.
Press the rotary knob to switch to the "(q CURSOR SHIFT" display.
(3) Changing the distance range
CD Press the softare key c(DIST ANCE RANGE:: to change the distance range.
The distance range window will appear to the screen.
CV Use the ..t:: and c(l:: software keys, or the rotary knob to modify the range from this screen.
CI Press the software key c(ENTER:: or the rotary knob to input the corrected
range.
(4) Changing the pulse width
CD Press the software key c(PULSE WIDTH:: to change the pulse width. The
pulse width window will appear to the screen.
CV Use the c(t:: and c(l:: software keys, or rotary knob to modify the width. CI Press the software key c(ENTER:: or rotary knob to input the corrected width.
(5) Changing the attenuation
CD Press the software key c(A TTENUA TION:: to change the attenuation. The
attenuation window will appear to the screen.
CV Use the c(t:; and ..l:: software keys, or rotary knob to modify the attenuation. CI Press the software key c(ENTER:: or rotary knob to input the modified
attenuation.
(6) Changing the lOR
CD Press the software key ..IOR:: to change the lOR. The lOR window will
appear to the screen.
1 .480
00
CV Use the ..t:; and c(l:; software keys, or rotary knob to modify. Switching between higher-order and lower-order half of the value is available from the ..COARSE ADJUST:; and ..FINE ADJUST:: software keys, respectively. CI Press the software key c(ENTER:: or rotary knob to input the modified
attenuation.
.t. HOW TO USE THE l~IT
(7) Changing the filter

CD Press the software key ..FIL TER:: to turn on or off the current filter setup. Pressing the key sequentially turns on or off the "FIL" indication at lower left
side of
the screen. "FIL" on the screen indicates the filter is used and no "FIL"
on the screen indicates the filter is out of operation.

(8) Changing the averaging count/time
CD Press the software key AVERAGING ..ST AR T/STOP:: to change the averaging count/time. The averaging count/time window will appear to the screen.
CV Use the ..:: and ..l:: software keys, or rotary knob to modify the averaging
count or time.
Q) Press the sofnvare key ..ENTER:: or rotary knob to input the modified
averaging count or time.
(9) Changing the approximation method
CD Press the software key ..LSA/TP A:: to change the approximation method. Pressing the key sequentially displays "LSA" and "TP A" at lower left side of the screen. "LSA" is turned on as long as the least square approximation is executed, and "TP A" remains on the screen when the two point approximation is in progress.
(10) Changing the distance unit

CD Press the sofnvare key ..0
1ST ANCE UNIT:: to change the distance unit. The
distance unit window will appear to the screen.

Km
mile
kf
CLOSE
CV Select a desired unit using the ..km::, ":mile:: or ..kf': software keys, or rotary
knob.
Q) After selecting a unit, press the software key ..ENTER:: or rotary knob to input your selection. The selected unit will appear to bottom of the screen, and the waveforni will be redrawn with this unit.
(11) Changing the wavelength
CD Change the wavelength using the ..:: and ..l:: software keys, or rotary knob.
CV Press the software key ..ENTER:: or rotary knob to input the modified value.
L-
(l2) Software key menu for CONDITIONS CD When CONDITIONS is open (LEVEL 2)
DISTANCE RANGE
PULSE WIDTH
A TTENUA TION
Selects the distance range (-tC1).
Selects the pulse width (-tC1).
............. Selects the attenuation (-tC1).

. Opens the next software key menu ( -t(V).
NEXT
EXIT
CI When the c(NEXT;: software key is pressed (LEVEL 2).

GROUP REFLECTION FACTOR FILTER
............. Selects the lOR (-t~).
............. Turns filter on or off.
AVERAGING COUNT/TIME
NEXT.
Selects the averaging count or time
( -t(1).
Opens the next software key menu ( -tG)).
Returns to the previous software key menu (-tCD).
RETURN
.t. HOW TO USE THE U\IT
CI When the -(NEXT:: software key is pressed (LEVEL 2).

LSAITPA
DIST ANCE UNITS
Switches between LSA and TP A.
Selects the Distance units (~C1).

Invalid
WAVE LENGTH
RETURN
Selects the wave length.

menu (~(l).
(i When setting DISTANCE RANGE/PULSE WIDTH! AVERAGING COUNT

(LEVEL 3).
i
1
Returns to the previous condition.
Changes to the next condition.
Invalid
Invalid
CLOSE
Returns to the previous menu
(~CD and (l).

(Q When setting lOR (LEVEL 3).
Increases the higher half of the digit

value.
l
COARSE ADJUST
Decreases the lower half of the digit

value.
Adjusts the higher half of the digit

value.
Invalid
CLOSE
Returns to the previous menu
( ~(l).
( When COARSE ADJUST is pressed in :(LEVEL 3).

T
Increases the higher half of the digit value.

Decreases the higher half of the digit value.
l
FINE ADJUST
Adjusts the lower half of the digit value.

Invalid
CLOSE
Returns to the previous menu ( ~CI).
(J When setting DISTANCE UNITS (LEVEL 3).
km
Selects "km" for DISTANCE UNITS.

Selects "mile" for DISTANCE UNITS.
mile
kf
Selects "kf' for DISTANCE UNITS.

Invalid.
CLOSE
Returns to the previous menu( ~CI).
4.3.4 Auto search of connection point
This section describes the AUTO SEARCH MENU to automatically search the connection point.
MODE SETUP APR.28.1997 13:29 MENU MARKER DISPLA'i LABEL: APR.28.1997 13:28 WL:L31 I'mSMCITTEN: 10.OdB SPLICE THRESHOLD: 0.10dB
I
(2
LEVEL 2
(i
CI
(j
PW: 4 1,5 GD AVERAGE 65,53 RETURN LOSS THRESHOLD: 58dB lOR: 1.48880 QWB'SCATTER:-50.88dB END OF FIBER THRESHOLD: 3dB
qp
EVENT DISTANCE SPLICE RETURN CUMMULATIVE EVENT

NO. (km) LOSS(dB) LOSS(dB) LOSS(dB) dB/km T'iPE
Q1 ~ Q Ql Q? QS
~TOTAL SPAN ORL 17.635
~
PRINT
LIST
1 9.934 0.362 (32.946 2.926 0.328 R (15.393 16.959 0.330 R END 49.458
EVENT NOTES
CHANGE
AUTO
SEARCH
SETTINGS
EXIT
1/2
E -= F
Figure 4-22
AUTO SEARCH Screen
QD Connection loss search level CD Date/time CV Indicates DISTANCE MODE is selected ~ Return loss search level ~ Fiber and search level CI Indicates AUTO SEARCH is selected tW Event No. CV Label
CI Wavelength
CI Pulse width
~ Event connection loss
(j lOR
CI Attenuation
CI A veraging count/time
Q Event return loss (1 Accumulated loss per Event

(l Loss per distance unit between Events
~ Event Type
(l Back scattered light level
~ Total return loss
11
71
(2) Key functions
(MODE) key:
(Fl to F5) keys:
Selects Trace mode.
software key menu. Calls the help menu.
Pressing this key once calls the DISTANCE SCALE CORRCTION option for scaling up or down the distance scale. Pressing it twice calls the DISTANCE SHIFT option for moving the waveform screen along the distance
(horizontal axis) scale in 1 dot.
Pressing it three times calls the DISTANCE SHIFT (fast forward) for quickly moving the waveform screen along the distance (horizontal axis) scale in 1
div.
These functions are valid only when the waveform

screen is turned on.
(dB SCALE) key:
Pressing this key once calls the dB SCALE CORRCTION option for scaling up or down the dB
(vertical axis) scale.
Pressing it twice calls the dB SHIFT for movinb the waveform screen along the dB (vertical axis) scale in
1 dot.
Pressing it three times calls the dB SHIFT (fast forward) for quickly moving the waveform screen
along the dB (vertical axis) scale in 1 div.
These functions are valid only when the waveform

screen is turned on.
(PREVIEW) key: AVERAGING
Redraws the waveform (~4.2 Measurement).
(START/STOP) key:
Starts or stops current measurement. Currently displayed measurement data is lost

(~4.2. Measurement).
(PRINT) key:
Rotary knob:
Outputs screen information to printer. The rotary knob has the different functions depending
on the selected function as follows:
't When "(g SELECT EVENT" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to select an event. Press the rotary knob to display the waveform of
the selected event.
When Ilcg SELECT CHARACTER" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to select a character. Press the rotary knob to enter it. When "cg CHANGE VALUE" is being displayedRotate the rotar knob to select a value. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected value. When l1cg CURSOR SHIFf" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the cursor on the waveform screen every 1 dot. Press the rotary knob to switch to the "cg
CURSOR SHIFf (FAST-FORWARD)" display.
When l1cg CURSOR SHIFf (FAST-
. FORW ARD)" is being displayedRotate the rotar knob to shift the cursor on the waveform screen every 1/5 div.
Press the rotary knob to switch to the "~ CURSOR SHIFf" display.
When l1cg DISTANCE SCALE CHANGE" is
being displayedRotate the rotary knob to change the distance scale for screen enlargement or compression. Press the rotary knob to switch to the "~ CURSOR SHIFf" display. When"~ dB SCALE CHANGE" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to change the decibel (dB) scale for enlargement or compression. Press the rotary knob to switch to the "~ CURSOR SHIFf" display.
When "cg DISTANCE SHIFf" is being

displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform distance (horizontal axis) scale. Press the rotary knob to switch to the "~ CURSOR SHIFf" display.
..,,
i: When "( DISTANCE SHIFf (FAST-
FORWARD)" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform screen every 1 div. on the distance (vertical axis)
scale.
i: When "( dB SHIFf" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform screen every 1 dot on the decibel (dB) scale. Press the rotary knob to switch to the "( CURSOR SHIFf" display.
i: When "( dB SHIFf (FAST-FORWARD)" is
being displayed-
Rotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform screen every 1 div. on the decibel (dB) (vertical
axis) scale.
(3) Description of AUTO SEARCH
Q) Outline
Calculates and displays event points of a waveform, connection loss at each event point, loss per unit distance between events and total return loss.
CV Operation Press the c(AUTO SEARCH. software key to cause automatic calculations and
display.
CI Note
(a) The AUTO SEARCH function searches events points such as connection points, far end or with large loss.
(b) Search is done on the displayed waveform within the dynamic range of the unit. Fresnel reflection (far end) being generated out of noise cannot be
searched.
(c) Generally, it is impossible to search far ends or breaking points on short fibers (200m or less) with pulse width of 1 us.
(d) Search error can result from above mentioned conditions or from noise. Double check must not be neglected.
(4) Backscattering light level
CD Outline The backscattering light whose level is less than the "BACKSCATTER LEVEL" (specified on the ANALYSIS menu during SETUP mode) is not loss or to eliminate a displayed on the screen. To check a smaller signal smaller backscattering light, use the following setup procedure. CV Setup
(a) Press the software key c(CHANGE AUTO SEARCH SETTINGS;: from the SETUP mode.
(b) Select the BACKSCATTER LEVEL. (c) Switch the step width by pressing the c(COARSE ADJUST:: or -cFINE ADJUST:: software keys, and change the value using the rotary knob.
(d) Set the desired value, and press the c(ENTER:: software key or press the rotary knob.
(e) Press the c(AUTO SEARCH;: software key from the DISPLAY mode.
(f) Calculation steps 01 to 05 are shown in sequence, and the recalculated
results are displayed.

CI Setup range
The backscattering light level can be displayed within the range of -64.99 dB to 10.00 dB in every 0.0 I-dB step.
(5) Connection loss detection level CD Outline The connection loss that is less than the "SPLICE LOSS THRESHOLD" (set on
the ANALYSIS menu during SETUP mode) is not displayed. To check a
smaller connection loss or to eliminate a smaller loss, use the following setup procedure.
CV Setup
(a) Press the -cCHANGE AUTO SEARCH SETTINGS:: software key.
(b) Press the -cCHANGE SPLICE THRESHOLD:: software key. (c) Switch the step width by pressing the c(COARSE ADJUST::/c(FINE ADJUST:: software keys, and change the value using the rotary knob.
(d) Set the desired value, and press the c(ENTER:: software key or press the rotary knob.
( e) Calculation steps 1 to 5 are shown in sequence, and the recalculated results are displayed.
CI Setup range
The connection loss can be displayed within the range of
0.01 dB to 9.99 dB in
every 0.0 l-dB step.
L1 _ 7::
(4 Setup notes
The connection loss may be shown as a negative value (- X. X X). This is a
negative loss (that is, the increased signal
level) which occurs when optical fibers having different characteristics are connected to each other. In such case, measure the connection loss from the opposite position and average these two values to determine the correct loss.
(6) Detection level of reflecting attenuation CD Outline The reflecting attenuation that is greater than the "RETURN LOSS THRESHOLD" (set on the ANALYSIS menu during SETUP mode) is not
displayed. To check a larger reflecting attenuation or to eliminate a larger
reflecting attenuation, use the following setup procedure.
CV Setup
(a) Press the c(CHANGE AUTO SEARCH SETTINGS:: software key.
(b) Press the c(CHANGE RETURN LOSS THRESHOLD:: software key. (c) Select a desired value using the rotary knob or the c(NEXT CONDITION::
software key.
(d) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or the rotary knob. (e) Calculation steps i to 5 are shown in sequence, and the recalculated results
are displayed.
CI Setup range
The reflecting attenuation can be displayed within the range of 20 dB to 60 dB in every I-dB step.
(4 Setup notes
The instrument calculates the reflecting attenuation based on the reference value (with i -microsecond pulse width) which has been set by the "BACK SCATTER this reference LEVEL" on the ANALYSIS menu during SETUP mode. If value is far away from the true value, an error may occur. When the true value is indeterminable due to saturation of fresnel reflection, the
measurement value should be preceded by the marking "c(" (such as c(24.500) to
indicate that actual return loss is smaller than the given measurement.
(7) End-point detection level
CD Outline
The end point of
the Fresnel reflection whose level is greater than the "END OF FIBER THRESHOLD" (set on the ANALYSIS menu during SETUP mode) is
eliminate such end point, use the following setup procedure.
not detected. To detect an end point having the larger Fresnel reflection or to
CV Setup
(a) Press the .cCHANGE AUTO SEARCH SETTINGS:: software key.
(b) Press the .cCHANGE END OF FIBER THRESHOLD:: software key.
.l. HOW TO LSE THE L!\lT
(c) Set the desired value using the rotary knob or the ..NEXT CONDITIO?\:?
software key.
(d) Press the ..ENTER:? key or rotary knob.

(e) Calculation steps 1 to 5 are shown in sequence, and the recalculated results
are .displayed.
CI Setup range
The end point level can be displayed within the range of 3 dB to 10 dB in every
i -dB step.
G) Setup notes
If the fiber end point cannot be detected within the detection range, add a
"greater than" symbol (":?") before the distance value (an example of ":?48. 752")
to indicate the end-point distance greater than the specified one.

(8) Total
loss
Displays total fiber loss, including the connection loss, in the search area.
(9) Total return loss
CD Outline Traditionally total return loss referred to the loss at single point such as at an loss of an optical connector or end point. In this document, however, total optical fiber refers to attenuation of the reflected light (including optical connector, end point and backscattering light) against the emission light along
the entire length of
the optical fiber.
Following expression is used for determining the total return loss:

ORL = 1 O*log (Por/Po)( dB)
ORL: Optical Return Loss

Por: Reflected light level Po: Emitted light level
If
the return loss measurement is done along entire length of an optical fiber (an ideal measurement), obtained value would be identical with the value derived from measurement of CW light done with a light source and optical power
meter.
(V Setting
It allows re-calculation which might be desired for more accurate measurement
of
the return loss. Refer to Section 4.3.4 (i 0).
.,.,
(10) Loss measurement between two points
CD Outline Measures a return loss (total return loss) between two points set by markers.
( Setting
When ca1culatng a loss between any two points on the waveform under measurement, use the following steps.
(a) Press the c(CHANGE AUTO SEARCH SETTINGS:: software key.
(b) Press the c(CHANGE TOTAL ORL SPAN:: software key.

(c) Using the rotary knob, move the cursor to right (or left) side of
the desired EVENT and press the c(SET SPAN ST ART:: software key to set the
START MARKR.
(d) Then, move the cursor to right (or left) side of
the desired EVENT using the rotary knob and press the c(SET SPAN END:: software key to set the END MARKR. The loss between the two points will be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.
APR.2B.1997 13:31
DISPLAY LEUEL 3
~
LSA
-----------,------------,.- -- -----.,--- ---- --- -~ - -- ------ ------------,. ---------.,------------r---- ------ -.,----------------------.,------------,.-----------.,---------- ---- .. ----------,. -------,----...-----,.---------.._.,-----------
- - ---- ----- ., - - - --- - --- -- r --- -- - -----., -- ---- -- ---- r- - - ----- - - - - - -- ---
- - --- -- - --., -- - ---- -- --- r-- ------ -- -.,---- - -- - - --r- -------- -------- ---- r--
5k
PAN TO TAL RL
26.333dB
0.000
I I . I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I . I I I I II I Ii i I I I I I I i I I I I i I I I I I I I I I i I I I I ,i, I I I I i I I I I I o , , . I I I I I o 0 I I I I I , 0 , . o , I I I I I I I I I I , i I I ,I , I I I I I I I , I . , , . , 0 , o , 0 , 0 0 , . 0 0 , 0 , , 0 , ,. ,,
o o o
BO km
SET
SPAN START
-----,.----------.,-----------------_.- -----------.,----------.,-----------,.-----------,----------..-
SET
SPAN
END
-_.. -- - ---.,-------- ---- ,.---- ---- -_.. .,-_.. ------- --
-------r--------- ------------r--
-------r--------- ------------r--
CALIBRATE SPAN
ORL
Distance:
WAUELENGTH: I. 31 ~m SM
PW : 4 ~s
B. 102km/
EXIT
lOR : 1. 4BOOO
ATTEN :10.00dB
AUERAGES 65k (2A16)
1/1
iF
ET THE SELECTED MARXER AT THE CURSOR POSITION.
Figure 4-23 Loss Measurement Between Two Points
(1 1) Description of calibration
CD Outline
Depending on situations, calibration of
this unit might be required for

the return loss:
calculating a return loss.

Situations where calibration is needed for calculation of
(a) When return loss is calculated by reading into this unit the waveform being
measured with other OTDR (even when the waveform is measured by a the same model). unit of
(b) When calculating a return loss on the waveform measured using the unit
being calibrated per Item 1 above.
( c) Calibration for secular distortion.
CV Calibration procedures
(a) Measure a long optical fiber. Use relatively wide pulse width (1 us, for
instance) so that backscattering light can be measured welL.
(b) Locate the cursor on the .position of backscattering light which is nearest to the near end.
(c) Press the (CALIBRATION) software key to complete the calibration. CAUTION
(a) In the usual operation, calibration is not required.
(b) In this operation, the backscattering light level at the cursor position (see item (2-(b) above) is calibrated so that it conforms to the backscattering loss level (specified from the ANALYSIS menu in the SETUP mode). Thus, the following cases can generate errors in determining the return loss due to incorrect calibration:
* The cursor position is too far away from the near end point. It
can cause a loss between the cursor position and the optical fiber connector. * The specified backscattering light loss value is not conforming to that of the fiber under measurement. (c) If the test equipments are not correctly configured, a correct return loss measurement may not be expected not only for the one given in Figure 4-23 but for Figure 4-22, too.
..,,
(12) Cumulative loss of events CD Outline Cumulative loss refers to an optical fiber loss value between the start point up to each event point. It is obtained from the expression given below: i + cumulative loss at 1 st event (dB) = dBIk in 1 st interval x length of 1 st interval + ---+ "i" th splice loss + dBIk in "i + 1 "th interval x length of "i + 1 ii th intervaL.
CAUTION Cumulative loss at ith event does not include the ith splice loss. Meaning of cumulative loss at far end (end point) is identical with conventionally
used "total
loss" .
(13) Types of events .

Indicates event (connection point) status.
S+ Events without reflection

S- Events without reflection (in case of
negative loss)
R Events with reflection
(14) Event list For calculation values used in the event list, refer to the following figure. As an example, following shows a measured waveform having two events.
(dB) START
(0)
(E)
(G)
(F)
(H)
(i)
(A)
(J)
(K)
(distance)
(B)
(e)
Event No.
Distance
(kI)
(A)
Splice loss (dB)

( lJ
Return loss (dB)

(0) fp) (q)
Comulative loss (dB)

(D)
Unit loss (dBlkm)

(r)
(s)
(1)
Event type
(ii )
(B)
(C)
(m)
(E)
(F)
(v)
END
(n)
(w)
Item
( l)
TOT AL SPAN ORL (x) Item name

Splice loss at Event 1
(m) (n)
(0 )
(p )
Splice loss at Event 2 Not displayed

Return loss at Event.1
Not displayed
Total loss
(q) (r) (s)

( t)
(li )
( v)
(w) (x)
Loss per unit distance between Start and Event 1 ((D)/(I)) Loss per unit distance between Events 1 and 2 ((G)/(J)) Loss per unit distance between Event 2 and End point ((H)/(K)) Total return loss between Start point and End point Loss per unit distance between Event land 2 ((G)/(J)) Loss per unit distance between Event 2 and End point ((H)/(K)) Total return loss between Start point and End point
*) For total return loss given in (u) above, refer to Item 4.3.4 (10).
4. HO\V TO USE THE l\'IT
(15) Editing the connection point
CD Overview If you found unnecessary connection points are searched or necessary connecting points are not searched when checked from the AUTO SEARCH menu, these pints can be added or deleted as described below.
(V Editing the connection point (a) Call the AUTO SEARCH menu in the TRACE mode. (b) Press the -(VIEW EVENT:: software key.
(c) Edit the connection points.
(d) Press the -(EXIT:? software key to perform recalculation of
the connection
point and display the search results.
CI Basic marker setting procedures

(a) Press the -(VIEW EVENT:? sortware key.
(b) Press the -(EDIT EVENT MARKERS::.
(c) When moving the marker at the 1st connection point to the 2nd connection
point, move the markers as indicated below to set the Markers Y -2 and t 3 l-
2 anew (see figure below):

Marker Y -l -- Marker CD-2
Marker CI-i -- Marker (V-2
1:1,
151 conneciion poini
~ -1
2iid connection point
Setting of the i st connection point
151 conneciion poini
2nd conncciion poini
Setting of the 2nd connection
r -,
GD Setting the marker \vhen an unnecessary connection point is present

(a) Press the -(VIEW EVENT:: software key.
(b) Press the -(EDIT EVENT MARKERS:?

(c) If
there is an unnecessary connection point (temporarily called 1') between
the 1 st and 2nd connection points, markers are set as follows since such connection point can affect the measurement.
(d) Move CI-l marker at the i st connection point to in front of II l'" th connection point. Move (V- i marker at the 2nd connection point to the
end of slope of II 1 '" th connection point.

'~;-1
1 st connection point
I'st connection point

Q)-2
2nd connection point
(e) For setting the marker when Fresnel reflection ispresent at a connection
point. Refer to Item 4.3.1 (12).
CI Adding the connection point

(a) Press the c(VIEW EVENT:: software key.
(b) Automatically searched event will be displayed on the measured waveform. (c) Move the cursor to the location where a connection point is to be added and press the ..INSERT EVENT:: software key.
(d) The event will be added to the intended measured waveform.

( Deleting the connection point
(a) Press the ..VIEW EVENT:: software key.
(b) Automatically searched event wil be displayed on the measured waveform. (c) Move the cursor to the location where the connection point is to be deleted and press the c(DELETE EVENT:: software key.
(d) The event on the intended measured waveform will be deleted.
(16) Inputting label to the connection points
CD Overview Label text can be added to connection points automatically searched with the AUTO SEARCH (menu). The label text can also be added to the edited connection points. Up to 60 characters may be used for the label text.
(2 Input method
(a) Call up the AUTO SEARCH (menu) in the TRACE (mode).
(b) Press the c(EVENT LABED software key.

(c) Refer to Item 4.3.2 for label input procedures.
(17) Printing the connection point search results
CD Overview Connection points automatically searched with the AUTO SEARCH or edited connection points can be printed.
(2 Printing procedures
(a) Call up the AUTO SEARCH (menu) in the TRACE (mode).

(b) Results of the connection point auto search will be printed out by pressing
the ..PRINT:: software key.

CD When AUTO
SEARCH is open (LEVEL 2)

VIEW EVENT
Executes VIEW EVENT
( ~(I).
Executes PRINT LIST.
PRIT
LIST
EVENT LABEL
CHANGE AUTO SEARCH SETTINGS
EXIT
Executes EVENT LABEL (~CI).

Executes CHANGE AUTO SEARCH
SETTINGS (~(l).
Returns to TRACE MODE screen (LEVELl).
(I When VIW EVENT software key is pressed (LEVEL 3)

NEXT EVENT
PREVIOUS EVENT
DELETE EVENT
Executes NEXT EVENT. Executes PREVIOUS EVENT. Executes DELETE EVENT.
NEXT
EXIT
Opens the next softare key menu ( ~CI).
Returns to AUTO SEARCH screen (LEVEL 2) (~CD)
CI When NEXT software key is pressed (LEVEL 3)

INSERT EVENT
Executes INSERT EVENT.
EDIT EVENT MARKERS

CLEAR
NEXT
Executes EDIT EVENT MARKER
(~~).
Clears all
labels being input.
Opens the next software key menu
( ~(i).
RETURN
menu (LEVEL 2) (~~).
G) When NEXT software key is pressed (LEVEL 3)

INITIALIZA TION
Executes INITIAL SETUP

Invalid
DELETE MARKR
Deletes markers
Invalid
RETURN
Returns to the previous softare key menu (LEVEL 2) (~G)).
C When EDIT EVENT MARKR? software key is pressed (LEVEL 3)
MARKR 1
Sets MARKER 1.
MARKR 2
MARKER 3
Sets MARKER 2.
Sets MARKER 3.
Sets MARKER Y2.
MARKER Y2
RETURN
menu (LEVEL 2) (~CI).
A 0.:
CI When EVENT LABEL is pressed (LEVEL 3)

Selects input character type ((~CI~
~).
Invalid.
ENTER
Enters selected labels and returns to
LEVEL 2.( ~CD).
NEXT
Opens the next software key menu ( ~(1). Stops label input and returns to LEVEL 2.( ~CD).
CANCEL
(1 When NEXT ITEM softare key menu is open (LEVEL 3)
~
+-
Moves the input position cursor in the label to right.

Moves the input position cursor in the
label to left.
Invalid.
NEXT
Opens the next software key menu ( ~CI).
RETURN

menu (~CI).
CI When NEXT ITEM software key menu is open (LEVEL 3)

INSERT
Inserts space to
the input position
cursor in the labeL.
DELETE
Deletes the character at the input

position cursor in the labeL.
CLEAR
Clears all
labels being input.
Invalid.
RETURN

menu (~(1).
i When inputting kanji (LEVEL 3).

Selects type of input character (~QD).
TURN PAGE MODE

ENTER
NEXT
Selects TURN PAGE MODE using the

rotary knob (~(l).
Enters selected characters.

(~0).
CANCEL
Q9 When TURN PAGE MODE software key is pressed (LEVEL 3).

CHARACTER SELECT MODE
DONE
Selects type of input character (~(j).
Selects character using the rotary knob
( ~i).
Enters selected characters.
NEXT
(~0).
CANCEL
Returns to the TRACE MODE screen (LEVEL i).
0-'
QY When using USER DICTIONARY (LEVEL 3).
Displays the next user dictionary contents
l.
READ
Displays the previous user dictionary contents
Adds a user dictionary at the cursor position.

Stores the character string on the cursor position to the user dictionar
Return to the previous software key
menu (~().
STORE
RETURN
Cl When c(CHANGE AUTO SEARCH SETTINGS (NEXT):: software key is pressed (LEVEL 3)
CHANGE AUTO SEARCH SETTINGS
*DISPLA Y
Changes the thresholds for for the connection loss, return loss and
fiber end point (~~).

Displays lOR of event (~Q).
Invalid
EVENT lOR
CHANGE ORL
SPAN
Changes ORL for each span.

Opens the menu (~(l).
RETURN
*
Returns to the AUTO SEARCH screen (~CD).
It appears when the span lOR setting is turned ON from the MEASUREMENT menu in the SETUP mode. (The CHANGE EVENT lOR will not appear when this function is turned OFF.)
(l When CHANGE SPLICELOSS THRESHOLD software key is pressed

(LEVEL 3)
Invalid.
. NEXT
ITEM
Selects NEXT ITEM (~tW).
COARSE
Adjusts
in 0.1 dB step (~~).
ADmST
ENTER
Enters the setting value and recalculates

( ~QD).
CANCEL
Stops CONDITION setup (~QD).
(l When COARSE ADJUST software key is pressed (LEVEL 3)

Invalid.
NEXT ITEM
FINE
Selects the NEXT ITEM (~Q9).
Adjusts in 0.0 1 dB step (~~).

Enters the setting value and recalculates
( ~QZ).
ADmST
ENTER
CANCEL
Stops CONDITION setup (~QZ).
( When NEXT ITEM software key is pressed in (l (LEVEL 3)

Invalid.
NEXT ITEM
NEXT CONDITION
Selects the NEXT ITEM.
Changes NEXT CONDITION.
ENTER
Enters the setting value, recalculates and returns to LEVEL 2 (~QZ).

Stops CONDITIONs and returns to LEVEL 2 (~QZ).
CANCEL
_ SlO
Q When c(DlSPLA Y EVENT lOR:: software key is pressed (LEVEL 2)
CHANGE
AUTO SEARCH
SETTINGS
DlSPLA Y EVENT TYPE
Changes threshold values for the connection loss, return loss and fiber end point.
Displays event type (~Q7).
SET lOR
Selects lOR between events.

Changes span ORL range. Opens the
CHANGE SPAN
ORL
menu (~~).
RETURN
Returns to the AUTO SEARCH screen (LEVEL 1) (~CD).
W When c(SET lOR:: software key is pressed (LEVEL 3)

NEXT CONNECTION POINT
PREVIOUS CONNECTION POINT
Selects the next event.
Selects the previous event.
COARSE ADJUST
ENTER
Executes adjustment in 0.01 dB (~Q).
Enters the set value (~Q).

Cancels the setting (~Q).
CANCEL
QS When -(COARSE ADJUST:: software key is pressed (LEVEL 3)
NEXT CONNECTION POINT

PREVIOUS CONNECTION POINT
Selects the next event.
Selects the previous event.
FINE ADJUST
Executes adjustment in O.OOOOL dB
( ~(1).
ENTER
CANCEL
Enters the set value (~Q).

Cancels the setting (~Q).
~ When CHANGE TOTAL ORL SPAN software key is pressed (LEVEL 3)

SET SPAN
Enters the Start Marker position.

Enters the End Marker position.
Invalid
START
SET SPAN END
CALIBRA TE SPAN ORL
Executes the CALIBRATE SPAN ORL
operation. .
Recalculates the span and returns to LEVEL 2.( ~Q).
EXIT
(\ 1
4.3.5 DISPLAY This section explains the DISPLAY MENU to display the initial screen and set the
distance origin.
(1) Key functions
(MODE) key:
(Fl to F5) keys:
Selects Trace mode.
software key menu. Calls the help screen.
Pressing this key once provides the CHANGE DISTANCE SCALE option for scaling up or down
the screen.
(dB SCALE) key:
Pressing the key twice provides the DISTANCE SHIFT option for moving the waveform in 1 dot along the distance (horizontal axis) scale. Pressing the key three times provides the DISTANCE SHIFT (fast forward) for moving the waveform in 1 dive quickly along the distance (horizontal axis) scale. Theses functions are valid only when the waveform display screen is turned on. Pressing this key once provides the CHANGE dB SCALE option for scaling up or down the screen. Pressing the screen twice provides the dB SHIFT option for moving the waveform in 1 dot along the dB
(vertical axis) scale.
Pressing the three times provides the dB SHIFT (fast

forward) for moving the waveform in 1 dive quickly
(PREVIEW) key: AVERAGING
along the dB (vertical axis) scale. Theses functions are valid only when the waveform display screen is turned on. Redraws the waveform (~4.2 Measurement).
(START/STOP) key:
Starts or stops current measurement. Currently displayed measurement data is lost

(~4.2 Measurement).
(PRINT) key:
Rotary knob:
Outputs screen information to printer. The rotary knob has the different functions depending on the selected function as follows: 1: When " SELECT MENU" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to select a menu. Press the rotary knob to open the selected menu.
t: When "( CURSOR SHIFT" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the cursor on the
Press the rotary knob to switch to the "t

CURSOR SHIFT (FAST-FORW ARD)" display.
t: When "( CURSOR SHIFT (FAST-
FORWARD)" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the cursor on the
waveform screen every 1/5 div.
Press the rotary knob to switch to the "t CURSOR SHIFT" display.
t: When "( DISTANCE SCALE CHANGE" is
being displayed. Rotate the rotary knob to change the distance scale for screen enlargement or compression.
Press the rotar knob to switch to the "t CURSOR SHIFT" display. t: When "( dB SCALE CHANGE" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to change the decibel (dB) scale for enlargement or compression. Press the rotary knob to switch to the "t CURSOR SHIFT" display. 1; When "( DISTANCE SHIFT" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform
distance (horizontal axis) scale. Press the rotary knob to switch to the "t CURSOR SHIFT" display.
1; When "( DISTANCE SHIFT (FAST-
FORW ARD)" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform
screen every 1 div. on the distance (vertical axis)

scale.
Press the rotary knob to switch to the "t CURSOR SHIFT" display. 1; When "dB SHIFT" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform
screen in 1 dot along the dB (vertical axis) scale. Press the rotary knob to switch to the "(i CURSOR SHIFT" display.
f'~
'i When "dB SHIFT (FAST-FORWARD)" is being

displayed -
Rotate the rotary knob to shift the waveform screen in 1 div. along the dB (vertical axis) scale. Press the rotary knob to switch to the "(8 CURSOR SHIFT" display.
(2) Connection point check
CD Outline The Connection Point Check function can be used to check the distance to the detected connection point, the connection loss, and reflecting attenuation on the
waveforms.
CV Setup
(a) Press the -:DISPLA Y-; software key, or open the DISPLAY menu using the
rotary knob. Pressing the c(NEXT EVENT:: software key sequentially sets markers to the connections point detected. The distance to the connection point, the connection loss, and the reflecting the waveform screen. attenuation are shown at the lower left side of
(b) To clear the cursor from the screen, just press the c(CLEAR CURSOR:: key. (c) To scale up or down the waveforms, use the (dB SCALE) or (DISTANCE SCALE) key. To return to the initial waveforms screen, just press the c(INITIALIZE::
IS.OI
MODE SETUP FILE APR.28.1997 13:33 MENU MARKER LABEL LEUEL 2 -1S.969dB IIAlnoo1004. TR: 80 km dB/ I , . . I . i I _....._-.... ------"T------.---..__...----..------..----------..------------..----------..--------i , i . I , I I I I i I . , I . I . I i . , , I I I . I i , I . I i I , I
---- -----.,-- ---------..----------------- ---------------,-----------,.----------..------------,. -- ----- ----..----------------- ---- ..-- ---------..----------.-- ----- -- - --- - ------- -..------- -----r --------- --..- ------- --- ,.-------.---.,-----------.------..- _.._.__...---_..._-......_-----,.---------,----------..--------.-...--..-...-.-..--._--..-....-_._.__..... ------.... _.. _..-.-----.----._.._.._.-....._--_.-- ._-_..-..-----------..-----------..-----._..-
software key.
LSA
_.....-..-- -------..---------.----_. ...-_.._-.-....--.-....-. ---------..--.--....-....---_.__.._-..-----------
Sk
I . . . . . . I I I I I I , . , , . I . i I , , I , , , I . . , I . . I , . . I I , , , I . , , , . . I I I I , . , . , . I , . I . I . I I . . . . I i I . . . . I I . I . . I , . I I I I I i , I . . I I I . I I I I . I I I I , I . I I .. I I . , . ., . I " , . I ..I .I .I .I I .,.. I,. .

8.102kml 16m
Splice Loss: 0.362dB
NEXT
EUENT
PRIOR
EUENT
---..--.-..-- ---_.__...-_._.__...-.__..__.-......----...-.--- .--.. ---------..-------.----...----------,------------
. I . I . I , .. i.'.. I. I. I , . I I .", I .. . I , , .. .. I , I . . . , I . . I . .. . I , . , I ,. I.' I . I. I .. , I. " , I .. . I

Figure 4-24
INITIALIZE
MORE
EXIT
PW : 4 ~s Marker 1-2 Marker 2-3 lOR :1.48000 2.926 dB 10.937 dB

AUERAGES 6Sk(2A16) 0.329dB/km 0.331dB/km
ELECT THE DESIRED DISPLA~ FUNCTION.
ATTEN :10.OdB 8.880 km 33.026 km

Connection Point Check
1/2
E -= F
.t. HOW TO USE THE U:\lT
CAUTION The NEXT EVENT software key sequentially displays connection points
detected with the unit software. Connection points displayed here are those detected by the AUTO SEARCH function described in Item 4.3.4. Although this AUTO SEARCH function carefully performs the detection, it may fail to fulfill its assignment if, for example, the target waveform has: * A connection loss point smaller than the specified leveL.
* Closely positioned multiple connection points.
* Large noise leveL. In such case, event points should be modified from the AUTO SEARCH
menu. Refer to Item 4.3.4 (15) for the procedure.
(3) Distance origin setup
CD Outline The Distance Origin Setup function can be used to use a dummy fiber during measurement or to measure the distance from any point. The following gives an example where the dummy fiber is used and its connection point is set as the origin for distance measurement.
Connection to the unit
D/
CJICJ
Connected by J-J
Dummy fiber(200m)
Fiber under test
",
CI Setup
(a) Locate the cursor onto the origin (that is, the 200-meter distance position
where the Fresnel reflection occurs) using the rotary knob, then press the
c(SET REFERENCE;: softare key. The "UP arrow" ("t") marker will
the screen. This point is the origin (O-meter position) for distance measurement.
appear at the bottom of
(b) Shift the cursor, and the "t" marker and the distance to the cursor position
will be displayed in the distance display area.
(c) To clear the reference marker, just press the c(CLEAR REFERENCE::
softare key.
(d) To set the reference marker again, press the c(SET REFERENCE;: software
key. The "t" marker will appear again.
APR.28.1997 13:37
LEUEL 2
dB/ 12.01
IIIIIIIII
o o o
20 km
SET REFERENCE
CLEAR REFERENCE
LSA
CLEAR CURSOR
20k
REF
AUG' NG 100~ Distance: Splice Loss: dB

RETURN
I . i i -0.203
--------- -- ,-- _._-- -----r ._---------.,------------r----- -----,----- --- ---,.----- ------.,-- -- - - - ----r-----------,------------
I I I l IIIIII I I . I I I I II I I , I i I i i I . I I I 506.4 I , I i m/ I I I 1m
, o
PW : 500 ns Marker 1-2 Marker 2-3

ELECT THE DESIRED DISPLA~ FUNCTION.
lOR : 1. :4BOOO dB km dB ATTEN 6.25dB km AUERAGES 65k(2..16) dB/km dB/km

Figure 4-25
Distance Origin Setup
2/2
iF
.t. HOW TO L:SE THE U:\IT
(4) Composing two waveforms measurements at both ends
CD Outline This function provides the splice loss measurement at a higher accuracy. When the splice loss of an optical fiber measured with the OTDR, the results the given fiber ends. Different may vary depending on characteristics of physical phenomena are induced by characteristics unique to respective fibers. To resolve this problem, you need to average the results obtained from both ends, and this function is used for that purpose.
( Setup
(a) Recall two waveforms measured from both ends to the same screen. (b) Make sure that the far end point of the reference waveforni matches the near end point of another waveform. If not, adjust the points by moving the cursor to the far end point of the reference waveform and pressing the o:SET FAR END POINT:; software key.
(c) At the near end point of contains much noise. If the reference waveforni, check if
another w3vefoI1
yes, move both waveforms to less noisy position using the cursor, then press the o:SET LEVEL:; software key.
(d) Create a composite waveform of
them using the c(COMPOSITE
WAVEFORM:; software key.
(e) If the waveforms composition is not required but averaging of the

connection loss alone is needed, press the 0:
A VERAGE CONNECTION
LOSS:; software key. Prior to executing this operation, you need to delete the event list obtained from the AUTO SEARCH, as needed. CAUTION The same conditions shall apply to the respective measurement taken at both ends. Otherwise, the waveform composition is not available,
,,-
CD When DISPLAY is open (LEVEL 2)

NEXT EVENT
PREVIOUS EVENT
INITIALZE
Moves cursor to the next event.
Moves cursor to the previous event.
Returns to the initial screen
NEXT
Selects the next software key menu
(~(V).
EXIT
- Returns to LEVEL 1.
(V When NEXT softare key is open (LEVEL 2)

SET REFERENCE
Sets the REFERENCE MARKER.
CLEAR REFERENCE
Clears the REFERENCE MARKER.
CLEAR CURSOR
Clears the cursor on the screen.
Invalid.
RETURN
Returns to the previous software key menu (~CD).
CI When NEXT software key is pressed (LEVEL 2) (When two or more waveforms are recalled from the file.)
SET DISTANCE ORIGIN
CLEAR DISTANCE ORIGIN
Sets the distance origin.
Deletes the distance origin.
DELETE CURSOR
SET MULTI WAVEFORM FUNCTION
Deletes the cursor.
Selects the MULTI WAVEFORM FUNCTION (~C1/C5).
RETURN
Returns to the previous softare menu

( ~CD).
(1 When MULTI WAVEFORM FUNCTION is pressed (LEVEL 2)
CURSOR TO NEXT WAVEFORM

CURSOR TO
Moves the cursor from the current waveform to the next one.
PREVIOUS WAVEFORM
Move the cursor from the current waveform to the previous one.
ALL WAVEFORMS SCALING UP/DOWN

COMPOSE WAVEFORM
Scales up or down every waveforms ( ~(5).
Composes the waveforms measured at both end (~C).

Opens the previous software menu ( ~CI).
RETURN
( When c(ALL WAVEFORMS SCALING UP/DOWN:: software key is pressed

(LEVEL 2)
CURSOR TO NEXT WAVEFORM

CURSOR TO
Moves the cursor from the current waveform to the next one.
Moves the cursor from the current waveform to the previous one.
PREVIOUS WAVEFORM
WAVEFORM SCALING UP/DOWN AT CURSOR POSITION

COMPOSE WAVEFORMS
RETURN
Scales up or down the waveform at the

cursor position (-7G)).
. Composes the waveforms measured at

both ends (-7().
Opens the previous software menu
( -70).
( When c(COMPOSITE WAVEFORM;: software key is pressed (LEVEL 2)
EXECUTE COMPOSE WAVEFORMS
SET FAR
Composes two waveforms to create a

new waveform.
END POINT
Moves the far end point of the reference waveform to the cursor position.
SET LEVEL
Calculation takes place on the OTDR so that the two waveform levels at the cursor position become equal.
Invalid.
RETURN
Opens the previous software menu
( -7().
4.4 SAVING THE MEASUREMENT DATA

This section describes the FILE mode in which measurement data is saved.
4.4.1 Save
Following describes the SAVE MENU to save measurement data and waveforms.
.( 1) Description of the screen
SAUE TO:
~
CI
G)
I I
DESTIN.DRIUE
DIRECTORY
FLOPPY DISK (A:)
-..---_....._- ..._-,.._--------..----------
f\
FILE TYPE
FILE
~:
I _~_--_-_-.~--__ _____~__-_----~-.-__-
I ,I II , . ,,
NEXT
ITEM
~:~F~:E_ _1_00:11 r-=t~~t::::-F=
LSA
ENTER
2ak
---------------..-------.--~---------,.---.-----T"--------..--------..--- ---,.-------..------
Distance: 3.585 km Splice Loss: dB

PW :5a ns Marker 1-2 Marker 2-3
, I , i I i , , . I . . I . I I . . . , . . I I . I . i I i I I I I , I ,I , .I , I I. . .
Figure 4-26
SAVE Screen
CANCEL
SAUE
km 586.4 ml 1m AUG' NG iaD::

SAUE
lOR : 1. 480aa dB dB ATTEN : 6.25dB km km AUERAGES 65k(2A16) dB/km dB/km

NTER THE DESTINATION FILE AND PRESS THE SAUE FILE KEY.
FILE
1/1
CD Drive name
~ Directory name
CI File type
G) File No.
(2) Key functions
(MODE) key:
(Fl to F5) keys:
Selects the FILE mode. Available functions are assigned according to the software key menu.
Calls the help screen.
(HELP) key: (DIST ANCE SCALE) key: (dB SCALE) key: (PREVIEW) key:
Invalid Invalid
AVERAGING (START/STOP) key:

(PRINT) key:
Rotary knob:
Starts or stops measurement. Currently displayed measurement data is lost (~4.2 Measurement). Outputs screen information to the printer. Rotary knob has the different functions depending on the selected functions as follows. 't When "SELECT MENU" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to select MENU. Press the rotary knob to open selected MENU. 't When "SELECT ITEM" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select ITEM. Press the rotary knob to open selected ITEM. 't When "SELECT FUNCTION" is being
displayed -
Rotate the rotary knob to select FUNCTION. Press the rotary knob to enter selected FUNCTION.
't When "SELECT FILE" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select FILE. Press the rotary knob to open selected FILE.
't When "CHANGE FILE No." is being

displayedRotate the rotary knob to select FILE No. Press the rotary knob to enter selected FILE No.
(3) Setup procedures
CD Setting the DRNE

(a) Locate the cursor onto DRIVE using the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key or
rotary knob.
(b) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob to open ITEM.
( c) Select DRIE using the c(? .:l? software keys or rotary knob. (d) Press the rotary knob to enter desired DRIVE. (1 Setting the DIRECTORY
(a) Locate the cursor onto DIRECTORY using the .:NEXT ITEM:: software key or rotary knob.
(b) Press the c(ENTER? software key or rotary knob to open ITEM. (c) Select DIRECTORY using the c(?, c(l:: keys, .:PAGE UP::, .:PAGE DOWN:: software keys or rotary knob.
(d) Press the c(ENTER? software key or rotary knob to enter desired DIRECTORY.
CI Setting the FILE
TYPE
(a) Locate the cursor onto FILETYPE using the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key or rotary knob.
(b) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob to open ITEM. (c) Select FILETYPE using the c(::, ..l? software keys or rotary knob. (d) Press the ..ENTER:: software key or rotary knob to enter desired FILETYPE.
G) Setting the FILE No.

(a) Locate the cursor onto FILE using the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key or rotary knob.
(c) Select FILE No. using the rotary knob.
(d) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob to enter desired No.
( Canceling the SAVE
(a) Locate the cursor onto SAVE CANCEL using the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key or rotary knob.
(b) Press the ..ENTER:: softare key or rotary knob to stop saving and return to SAVE screen.
( Executing the SAVE
(a) Locate the cursor onto SAVE FILE using the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key or rotary knob.
(b) Press the c(ENTER:: softare key or rotary knob to stop saving and return
to SAVE screen.
(4) File
type
CD TRA
All information of the unit including measurement traces and measurement conditions.
SET
Measurement conditions.
CI SCR
Screen information.
CD
LST
Events list information.
0
C0
BMP
Screen information (bit-map format).

TIF
Screen information (TIFF format).

(5)
Softare key menu for SA VE
CD
Menu for opening SA VE (LEVEL 2)
DIRECTORY
Opens file list on the directory (--0).
NEXT ITEM
Selects NEXT ITEM.
ENTER
CANCEL SAVE
SAVE FILE
Opens CONDITION (--CI/CD).
Cancels SAVE and returns to FILE mode screen (LEVEL i).
Executes SAVE and returns to FILE mode screen (LEVEL 1).
~ When DIRCTORY is pressed (LEVEL 3)
t l
PAGE UP
Moves up the cursor in DIRECTORY.
Moves down the cursor in DIRECTORY.

Scrolls page up.
PAGE DOWN
EXIT
Scrolls page down.
Returns to SAVE screen (LEVEL 2) (~CD).
el When setting DRIE, DIRCTORY or FILETYPE (LEVEL 3)

NEXT ITEM
Selects ITEM.
Moves up the cursor.
l
ENTER
Moves down the cursor.
Enters CONDITION and DIRECTORY and returns to SAVE screen (LEVEL 2) (~CD).
Cancels setting of CONDITION/ DIRECTORY and returns to SAVE screen (LEVEL 2) (~CD).
CANCEL
G) When setting FILE No. (LEVEL 3)
l
COARSE ADJUST
Adjusts file No. in 10 steps. (~0)

Enters FILE No. and returns to SAVE screen (LEVEL 2) (~CD).
FILE No. and returns to SAVE screen (LEVEL 2) (~CD).
Cancels setting of
ENTER
CANCEL
o When c(COARSE ADJUST:: softare key is pressed (LEVEL 3)
l
FILE
ADJUST
ENTER
Adjusts file No. every one step. ( ~G))
Enters FILE No. and returns to SAVE screen (LEVEL 2) (~CD).

FILE No. and returns to SAVE screen (LEVEL 2) (~CD).
Cancels setting of
CANCEL
4.4.2 Recall
This section describes the RECALL MENU to recall a file being saved.
Following shows the Recall screen.

MODE
MENU
FILES= 14
Q)
000. TRA 001. TRA 002. TRA

003. TRA
OOO.BMP 01.15. '95

*
N035-1
a4.25. '97
RECALL
01.15. '95
FILE
PILE
RECALL
01.15. '95
a1.15.'95
01.15. '95 01.15. '95
004 . TRA
005. TRA 006. TRA
01.15.'95
N043
04.25. '97
a1.15. '95 a1.15. '95 a1.15. '95
FILE
007. TRA 810. TRA
OIL TRA
812. TRA 013. TRA 020. TRA
MORE
a1.15. '95
a1.15. '95
EXIT
413,184 BYTES USED 1,044,480 BYTES FREE
1/2
E -= F
SE THE CURSOR KNOB TO SCROLL THE FILES.
Figure 4-27
RECALL Screen
CD Drive name
o Directory name
o File No.
(2) Key functions
(MODE) key:
(Fl to FS) keys:
Selects the FILE MODE.

(HELP) key: (DISTANCE SCALE) key: (dB SCALE) key: (PREVIEW) key:
software key menu. Calls the help screen. Invalid. Invalid. Redraws the waveform (~4.2 Measurement).
(AVERAGING START/STOP) key:
(PRIT) key:
Rotary knob:
Starts or stops measurement. Currently displayed measurement data is lost (~4.2 Measurement). Outputs screen information to the printer. Rotary knob has the different functions depending on the selected functions as follows. t: When "~SELECT MENU" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select MENU. Press the rotary knob to open selected MENU. t: When "~SELECT FILE" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select FILE. Press the rotary knob to selected open FILE. t: When "~FUNCTION" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select FUNCTION. Press the rotary knob to selected enter
FUNCTION.
(3) Setting procedures
CD Setting the drive
(a) Press the c(CHANGE DRIE/DIRCTORYIFILETYPE:: software key. (b) Press the -cNEXT ITEI'if:: to locate the cursor to DRIE. (c) Select the drive using the -c::, c(.l:: software keys or rotary knob. (d) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob to enter selected drive.
(e) Press the c(CANCEL: softare key or select CANCEL using the rotary knob and press it to cancel the drive setup.
W Setting the directory

(a) Press the c(CHANGE DRIVE/DIRCTORYIFILETYPE:: software key.
(b) Press the -cNEXT ITEM:: software key to locate the cursor to D IRECTO R Y.
(c) Select the directory using the c(::, -c.l:: software keys or rotary knob. (d) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob to enter selected directory. (e) Press the c(CANCEL: softare key or select CANCEL using the rotary knob and press it to cancel the directory setup.
CI Setting the file type

(a) Press the -cCHANGE DRIVE/DIRECTORYIFILETYPE:: software key.
(b) Press the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key to locate the cursor to FILETYPE. (c) Select the filetype using the c(::, c(.l:: software keys or rotary knob. (d) Press the -cENTER:: software key or rotary knob to enter selected filetype.
(e) Press the c(CANCEL: software key or select CANCEL using the rotary
knob and press it to cancel the filetype setup.
CV Executing the recall

(a) When the above steps CD to 0 are complete, press the -(RECALL:
software key.
(b) Trace mode is selected and the file being recalled will be displayed in the waveform.
Setting for the simultaneous waveform display in layers

(a) Press the c(SET WAVEFORMS TO BE RECALLED IN LAYERS:;
software key.
(b) Choose the recalling file using the rotary knob and press the c(SET FILE:: the file, "*" appear on the left software key to finish entry. Upon entry of the entered file name in the sequence of hand side of red, blue, green and black.
(c) Press the c(DISPLA Y FILES IN LAYERS:: software key to call the
waveforms of the designated files. Respective waveforms appear in layers at 1 div. interval in the Y-axis in the order of file designations. Also, respective waveforms appear under the
recorded conditions.
(d) Indication of these waveforms means that the system is under the waveform indication mode. Now, set to call the indication condition menu. Then, press the c(SETTING FOR THE MULTIPLE WAVEFORM FUNCTION:; software key to make designations ofwavetorms to locate the cursor at and designations of enlarging or contracting the waveforms.
At this time, indications like exemplified below appear lower right of
the
display. Example
File : Label
=OOl.TRA 002.TRA
* 003.4
* 004.5
Meanwhile, the marks given to the left of respective file names stand for the followings: The waveform at which the cursor is being located.
* Waveforms under different measurement conditions and
indication conditions from those of the waveform at which the cursor is being located.
No mark Waveforms under the same measurement conditions and

indication conditions as those of the waveform at which the cursor is being located.
CAUTION . Upto 4 waveforms can be indicated at once. . Simultaneous indications of the following fie types are invalid: .SET, .LST, .BMP, .TIF or .SRC.
( Setting for difference waveform indication of two waveforms
(a) Press the c(SET WAVEFORMS TO BE RECALLED IN LAYERS::

softare key.
(b) Choose a reference waveform using the rotary knob and press the c(SET REFERENCE FILE:: softare key to finish entry. Upon entry of the the entered fie name in reference fie, "*" appears on the left-hand side of
red.
(c) Then select a waveform to compare using the rotary knob and press the c(SET FILE:: softare key to finish entry. . Upon entry of the reference file,
"*" appears on the left-hand side of
the entered file name in blue.
(d) Press the c(DISPLA Y FILES IN LAYERS:; software key to indicate the two waveforms of the designated file and the difference waveform of waveforms. At this time, the difference waveform is indicated in green. Respective waveforms appear in layers at 1 div. interval in the Y-axis in the order of file designations. Also, respective waveforms appear under the
recorded conditions.
(e) Indication of these waveforms means that the system is under the waveform indication mode. Now, set to call the indication condition menu. Then, press the c(SET MULTIPLE WAVEFORM FUNCTION:: software key to waveforms to locate the cursor at and designations of make designations of enlarging or contracting the waveforms. the At this time, indications like exemplified below appear lower at right of
display. Example
File : Label
00 i .TRA
002.TRA OEF
Meanwhile, "DEF" stands for difference waveform.
Meanwhile, the marks given at left of respective file names stand for the followings: The waveform at which the cursor is being located. * Waveforms under different measurement conditions and the waveform at which the indication conditions from those of cursor is being located.
Waveforms under the same measurement conditions and indication conditions as those of the waveform at which the cursor is being located. CAUTION . Upto 4 waveforms can be indicated at once. . Simultaneous indications of the following fie types are invalid: .SET, .LST, .BMP, .TIF or .SRC.
No mark
(j Setting of SORT
This is the function for changing the file order.

(a) Press the -cSORT BY:: software key.
(b) Select conditions using the rotary knob or the c(?, c(l:: software keys. Conditions to be set are as follows:
FILE NO. Sorts files in the ascending order. TYPE Sorts fies in the alphabetical order of file tyes
FILE
( extension letters).
DA TE Sorts files in the date order.

LABEL Sorts files in the alphabetical order of labels.
CI Composition of waveforms measured at both ends (-? Item 4.3.5) This function is employed when more than usual accuracy is required for the splice loss measurement. When the splice loss measurement is taken on an optical fiber using the OTDR, results may vary depending on the given fiber ends. It is due to different physical phenomena resulting from characteristics unique to respective fibers. To resolve this problem, you need to average the results obtained from both
ends. This function is used for that purpose.
(a) Press the software key c(SELECT WAVEFORMS RECALLED IN

LA YER::.
(b) Move the rotary knob to the desired waveform, then press the c(SELECT
FILE:: software key to input the selection. A blue "*,, marking will be
added to the file entered.
(c) Press the software key c(VIEW SPECIFIED FILE IN LAYERS to display the waveform contained in the specified files. Waveform are displayed the file selection. (with 1 div space between them along Y axis) in order of
(d) Then, select the DISPLAY menu from the current DISPLAY mode which has been introduced when the above software key has been pressed. CAUTION
The same conditions shall apply to the respective measurements taken place at both ends, otherwise, the waveform composition wil not be available.
,1 111
CD When RECALL is opened (LEVEL 2)

CHANGE
Executes changes of the

drive/directory and fie tye. (--CI)
DRIE/DIRCTOR Y /
FILE TYPE
RECALL FILE
Returns to the waveform indication mode picture to open the designated

file.
SET WAVEFORMS TO BE RECALLED IN

LA YERS
Executes the setting for recalling of multiple files. (--CI)

Calls the next page of the software key
menu. (--(g)
NEXT
EXIT
Returns to the memory recalling mode screen (LEVEL 1).
(g When the c(NEXT:: software key is pressed c(LEVEL 2::

SORTING METHOD
PRIT FILE LIST
Aranges sorting.
Prints out the file list.
PREVIOUS
P AGE FILE LIST
Indicates the file list of
the previous
page.
Indicates the file list of
NEXT PAGE FILE LIST

EXIT
the next page.
Returns to the FILE screen (LEVEL

2). (--CD)
CI When the c(CHANGE DRIEIDIRECTORY/FILE TYPE:: key is pressed

(LEVEL 3).
NEXT ITEM
Opens the next item.
t l
ENTER
Moves the cursor up.
Moves the cursor down.
Enter conditions and returns to the
FILE screen (LEVEL 2). (~CD)

CANCEL
Cancel the condition setting and returns to the recalling screen (LEVEL
2).
( --CD).
(l When the -(SET WAVEFORMS TO BE DISPLAYED IN LAYERS). software key is pressed (LEVEL 2).
CHANGE DRIVE/DIRECTORY / FILE TYPE
DISPLA Y FILES IN
LA YERS
SET FILE
Executes changes of the
drive/directory and file type. (~CI)

Indicates the designated files in layers.
(--Item 4.3.5)
Executes settings for recalling files.
SET REFERENCE FILE

RETURN
Executes settings for reference files.
Opens the software key menu of
the
previous page. (~CD).
4.4.3 Copy This section describes the COPY MENU to copy the measurement data and waveform
data.
(l) Descnption of screen
MODEl SETUP I TRACE _lI'Il~SPECIALl:SELECT ITEM
MENU SAUE RECALL i . DELETE

3.E1B6dB mArtD01813. TRA:
f2
~
(Q
7
COPY FROM:
DRIVE
DIRECTORY
FILE TYPE START FILE
END FILE
COPY TO:
I , , I . , . 1\ ~ I ,. I , . . I II .. i , ., .
I FLOPPY DISK (A:) I
I FLOPPY DISK (A:) I
NEXT
-,.--.-----...----- ----...-.--.....-............_--r----------....--.----..----------..------.....COPY
DRIUE
DlRETOPY
2E1k
\OTDR CANCEL COPY
I I , ~I I . I . , I , , i . .i I .
i EIE1E1 I
-~---.__...--- ._.-..._-------~-._._._.
-~._------..-- ----,.---_._--..------.---
-,.---.-----.-..---- -----..----..--_...._----------
CI
START FILE
COpy FILE(S)
I EIE1E1 I
-~---------..----- ._._--,.-------.,----------
REF
I , , . , , , . . . I . , I , I . , ,
Distance: 3.585 Ia Splice Loss: dB

WAUELENGTH: 1.31 ~m SM Return Loss: dB
-E1.283 Ia 5E16.4 m/ 1m
,iIi I I I , , .. I II ,.
, . I I . . . . . I . I I i I I , , I
. . , i . , . , . . I . , , I , I I
I I I I , , , , I I I I I I . I I
ITEM
DIRECTORY
ENTER
CANCEL
COPY
AUG' NG 1E1E1;;
COpy
lOR :1.4BOEIEI dB dB ATTEN : 6. 25dB km km AUERAGES 65k(2A16) dB/km

Figure 4-28
CD
FILE(S)
1/1
dB/km E ~F
NTER THE SOURE AND DESTINATION FILES AND PRESS THE COPY FILE(S) KEY.
COpy Screen
Drive:
Name of COPY FROM-DRIE

Name of COPY FROM-DIRECTORY
File tye to be copied.
(1 Directory:
CI File type:
(l
Start file number: Start file No. to be copied.
~
(j
End file number:

Directory:
End file No. to be copied.

Name of
CI Drive:
COPY TO-DRIVE
Name of
COpy TO-DIRECTORY
Start file number: Start file No. to hold the new copy.
(2) Key functions
(MODE) key: (Fl - F5) keys:

(HELP) key:
(DIST ANCE SCALE) key:
Selects the FILE mode. Available functions are assigned according to the software key menu. Calls the help screen.
Invalid Invalid
(dB SCALE) key: (PREVIEW) key: AVERAGING

Starts or stops measurement. Currently displayed
(START/STOP) key:
(PRIT) key:
Rotary knob:
measurement data is lost (~4.2 Measurement). 01ltputs screen information to the printer. Rotary knob has the different functions depending on the selected functions as follows. t? When "SELECT MENU" is being displayedRotate the rotary knob to select MENU. Press the rotary knob to open selected MENU. t? When "SELECT ITEM" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select ITEM. Press the rotary knob to open selected ITEM. t? When "SELECT FUNCTION" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select FUNCTION. Press the rotary knob to enter selected FUNCTION. t? When "SELECT DIRECTORY" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select DIRECTORY. Press the rotary knob to enter selected FUNCTION. t? When "CHANGE FILE No." is being displayed
Rotate the rotary knob to select FILE No.
Press the rotary knob to enter selected FILE No.
11':
(3) Setting procedures
CD Selecting the drive holding the file to be copied.

(a) Locate the cursor onto COpy FROM-DRIVE using the c(NEXT ITEM:: software k~y or rotary knob.
(b) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob to open ITEM. (c) Select desired drive using c(t::, c(l:: softare keys or rotary knob. (d) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob to enter selected drive. CI Selecting the directory holding the file to be copied.
(a) Locate the cursor onto COPY FROM-DIRECTORY using the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key or rotary knob.
(b) Press the c(ENTER~ software key or rotary knob to open ITEM.
(c) Select desired directory using the c(t::, c(l::software keys or rotary knob.
(d) Press the c(ENTER:: softare key or rotary knob enter selected directory.
G) Selecting the file type to be copied

(a) Locate the cursor onto COPY FROM-FILETYPE using the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key or rotary knob.
(b) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob to open ITEM. (c) Select desired file type using the c(t::, c(l:: software keys or rotary knob. (d) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob to enter selected file type.
(l Setting the start file to be copied.
(a) Locate the cursor onto COpy FROM-START FILE using the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key or rotary knob.
(b) Press the c(ENTER~ software key or rotary knob to open ITEM. (c) Select the start file using the c(t::, c(l:: software keys or rotary knob. (d) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob enter selected start file. CI Setting the end file to be copied
(a) Locate the cursor onto COPY FROM-END FILE using the -cNEXT ITEM~ software key or rotary knob.
(b) Press the c(ENTER~ software key or rotary knob to open ITEM. (c) Select the end file using the -ct::, -cl:: software keys or rotary knob. (d) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob enter selected end file.
( Selecting the directory to hold the new copy
(a) Locate the cursor onto COPY TO-DRIVE using the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key or rotary knob.
(c) Select desired drive using the c(t~, c(l:: software keys or rotary knob.
(d) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob enter selected drive.
(j Selecting the directory to hold the new copy
(a) Locate the cursor onto COpy TO DIRECTORY using the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key or rotary knob.
(b) Pre~s the c(ENTER;: software key or rotary knob to open ITEM. (c) Select desired directory using the o:::, o:l:: software keys or rotary knob. (d) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob enter selected directory.
( Selecting the start file to be copied to

(a) Locate the cursor onto COpy TO START FILE using the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key or rotary knob.
'(b) Press the o:ENTER;: software key or rotary knob to open ITEM. (c) Select desired start file using the o:::, o:l:: software keys or rotary knob. (d) Press the o:ENTER;: software key or rotary knob enter selected directory.
CI Executing the copy
(a) Press the o:COPY FILE(S):: software key or select COPY FILE(S) with the
rotary knob and press it.
(b) This executes the copy and returns the display to FILE screen. Q9 Canceling the copy
(a) Press the c(COPY CANCEL;: softare key or select COPY CANCEL with the rotary knob and press it.
(b) This cancels the copy and returns the display to FILE screen.
(4) Continuous print function
In the copy menu, set COpy TO-DRIVE to PRINTER to enablbe continuous

printing.
CD Set COpy TO-DRIE to PRINTER
(1 Set START FILE (Start file number) and END FILE (End file number) to enable continuous printing
G) Execution of copy enables continuous print function. Setting of printer shall be executed in the FUNCTION SETUP mode. * Press the o:PRINT:: software key to stop printing.
(5) Software key menu for copy
CD Selecting the COPY (LEVEL 2)

NEXT ITEM
Selects item.
COpy
DIRECTORY
Executes copy of
DIRECTORY.
ENTER
Selects CONDITION (~CV).
CANCEL
COpy
COPY FILE(S)
Cancels to copy, and returns to FILE MODE screen (LEVEL 1)
. Executes the copy, and returns to FILE MODE screen (LEVEL 1)
CV When the c(ENTER:: software key is pressed (LEVEL 3).

NEXT ITEM
Selects next item.
t l
ENTER

Enters CONDITION and returns to COpy screen (LEVEL 2) (~CD).
Cancels CONDITION setup, and
returns to COpy screen (LEVEL 2)
( ~CD).
CANCEL
G) When START FILE is selected (LEVEL 3)
t l
COARSE ADJUST
Mores previous file number.
Moves to next file number.
Adjusts FILE No. for every 10 steps.
ENTER
Enters the file number, and returns to COpy screen (LEVEL 2). (~CD)
Cancels file number setup, and returns to COpy screen (LEVEL 2). (~CD)
CANCEL
(l When thee -(COARSE ADJUST:: softare key is pressed (LEVEL 3)
t l
FINE ADJUST
Shifts the "FILE No." cursor upward
Shifts the "FILE No." cursor downward.

Adjusts FILE No. for every 1 step.
ENTER
Enters the file number, and returns to COpy screen (LEVEL 2). (~CD)
Cancels file number setup, and returns to COpy screen (LEVEL 2). (~CD)
CANCEL
4.4.4 Delete
This section describes the DELETE MENU to delete the measurement data or waveform data file.
(1) Description of
the screen
MODEl
MENU
APR.28.1997 14:02
COpy
FORMAT LEUEL 2
CHANGE
(A:) I
*
F ILES= 14 DR IUEI
DIRECTORY
OOO.BMP 01.15. '95

BOO. TRA
BOl. TRA B02. TRA B03. TRA B04. TRA
E105. TRA
/TYPE
DELETE
N035-1
04.25. '97 01.15. '95
FILE
01.15.'95
01.15. '95
01.15.'95 01.15.'95
01. 15. '95
N043
04.25. '97 01.15. '95
01.15. '95 01.15. '95 01.15. '95
ElL.
FILE LIST
PAGE
UP
B06. TRA
E107 . TRA
010. TRA
011. TRA 012. TRA 013. TRA
E120. TRA
FILE LIST
PAGE
DOWN
15. '95
EXIT
413,696 BYTES USED 1,043,968 BYTES FREE
1/1
E -= F
SE THE CURSOR KNOB TO SCROLL THE FILES.
Figure 4-29
CD
DELETE Screen
Label
Drive name
CI Directory name
G) File No.
(2) Key functions
(MODE) key:
(Fl - F5) keys:
(HELP) key:
(DISTANCE SCALE) key: (dB SCALE) key: (PREVIEW) key: AVERAGING
Selects the FILE mode. Available functions are assigned according to the software key menu. Calls the help screen. Invalid. Invalid. Redraws waveforms (--4.2 Measurement).
(START/STOP) key:
(PRINT) key:
Rotary knob:
Starts or stops a measurement. Measurement data currently displayed is lost (--4.2 Measurement). Outputs screen information to the printer. Rotary knob has different functions depending on the function selected. t? When "(fSELECT MENU" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select MENU. Press the rotary knob to open the selected MENU.
t? When "(fSELECT FILE" is being displayed
Rotate the rotary knob to select FILE.
Press the rotary knob to open the selected FILE. t? When "(fSELECT FUNCTION" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select FUNCTION. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected FUNCTION. t? When "(fSELECT DIRECTORY" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select DIRECTORY. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected DIRECTORY.
(3) Setup method
CD Setting the drive (a) Press the c(CHANGE DRIEIDIRECTORYIFILETYPE:: software key.
(b) Locate the .cursor to DRIE by pressing the -cNEXT ITEM:: software key.
(c) Select DRNE using the c(t:: and c(l:: software keys or the rotary knob. (d) Press the c(ENTER:: software key or rotary knob to enter the selected DRNE.
(e) Or canceling the drive setting, press the c(CANCEL:: software key or select the drive using the rotary knob and press it.
o Setting the directory
(a) Press the c(CHANGE DRIEIDIRECTORYIFILETYPE:: software key. (b) Press the c(NEXT ITEM:: software key to locate the cursor to DIRECTORY.
(c) Select DIRCTORY using the c(t:: and c(l:: software keys or rotary knob. (Refer to Item 4.3.2, Label Input.) (d) Press the c(ENTER:: softare key or rotary knob to enter the selected
DIRECTORY.
(e) For canceling the directory setting, press the c(CANCEL:: software key or
select CANCEL using the rotary knob and press it.
CI Setting the file type

(a) Press the c(CHANGE DRNE/DIRCTORY/FILETYPE:: software key.
(b) Press the -cNEXT ITEM:: software key to locate the cursor to FILE
TYPE.
(c) Select FILETYPE using the c(t:: and c(l:: software keys or rotary knob. (d) Press the -cENTER:: software key or rotary knob to enter the selected FILETYPE.
(e) For canceling the filetye setting, press the -cCANCEL:: software key or select CANCEL using the rotary knob and press it.
CV Setting the file
(a) After CD through CI above are complete, select FILE using the rotary
knob.
CI Executing the delete file

(a) After CV file setting is complete, press the -cDELETE FILE:: software key.
(b) The message "DELETE THIS FILE?" will appear. (c) Press the -cYES DELETE FILE:: software key or rotary knob to delete the selected file.
(d) For canceling the file delete, press the -cCANCEL:: software key or select NO using the rotary knob and press it.
CD When the DELETE is open (LEVEL 2)

CHANGE
DRIEl
Executes CHANGE DRIE/

DIRCTORY/FILETYPE. (~)
DIRECTORY/ FILETYPE
DELETE FILE
Enters DELETE FILE. (~G))

Displays FILE LIST of the previous page.
Displays FILE LIST of the next page.
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
EXIT
Returns to LEVEL 1
CV When the -(CHANGE DRIVE/DlRECTORYIFILETYPE:: is pressed

(LEVEL 3)
NEXT ITEM
Selects next item
Moves up the cursor Moves down the cursor

Enters the CONDITIONS, and returns to DELETE screen (LEVEL 2). (~CD)
Cancels the CONDITIONS, and returns to DELETE screen (LEVEL 2). (~CD)
l
ENTER
CANCEL
CI When the DELETE FILE is open (LEVEL 3)

YES DELETE FILE
Deletes the selected file and returns to LEVEL 2 (--W)

Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
CANCEL
Cancels the file deletion, and returns to DELETE screen (LEVEL 2). (--W)
4.4.5 Format
This section describes the FORMT MENU to format each drive and to create a new
directory .
APR.28.1997 14:05
i . LEUEL 2
.0
(1
IDRIUt
.;i7)~i.'.1:l."i:.(:~
I.: I: . :. :
. . . . . . . .
20 km
SELECT DRIUE
---j-'--'---i-"-- --.-..r-----------j-------.-
FORMAT
DRIVE
LSA
CREATE DIRECTORY
2Bk
...-----~-_._._.~._----~----------_._--:.-._-_.._.L.-- -_._--~-_._.__...._..._---
Distance: 3.585 km Splice Loss: dB

AUELENGTH: 1.31 ~m SM Return Loss: dB
, , , , , , , , , DELETE ! i DIRECTORY km 506 _ 4 m/ 1m AUG' NG 100~

EXIT
AUERAGES 65k (2:16) dB/km dB/km

ELECT THE DESIRED FUNCTION.
lOR : 1.480 dBkm dB TTEN : 6.25dB km

Figure 4-30
DRIVE SELECTION Screen
W :598 ns Marker 1-2 Marker 2-3
1/1
CD Drive name
4. HO\Y TO lSE THE l:\IT
APR.28.1997 14:08
LEUEL 3
~
LSA
DRIUE
- --- -------~------- -----~ --- -- ---- --~--- -----..--- ~----------- ~- -----------~---------..-~----- ------~---- ---- ---.:------- -- ---
.. n - -u-i------------r SELECT FORMAT TYPE -r----n---ul----- ---n-rnn-------i----------n
-----------~------------r CANCEL ..r---- ---- ---~----- ------r-----------i- - --- -- ------ ----- ----,- -- -------_..,. ---.... ------,- -----------,.-------.... --,------------,.---- ---- ---,----- ------,.---------- -,------- -- ---
20k
REF
----mmT-----m-------m-ru---u-rn------nr---------rnn-----T-- ---T------------------
l I i i . , , . I I I I i : : : : : : : : : i I I I I I I I , I I I . i : : I i ! , j : : i j i i I I I i I I I I i : : ! : ! ! :
1.44n(2H) 72K (2DD) ,
Figure 4-31 FORMAT Screen
20 km
---,.--- - -------,----- - - ----,.-------- ---"'--- -- -- - - ---
UP
DOWN
ENTER
Distance: 3.585 km Splice Loss: dE

SE THE CURSOR KNOE vB SOFT KE'iS TO SELECT.
-0.283 506.4 m/ 1m AUG 'NG 100~

CANCEL
WAUELENGTH: 1.31 ~m SM Return Loss: dE
lOR : 1. 48800 dE dE ATTEN : 6. 25dE km km

AUERAGES 65k (2A 16) dE/km dE/km
1/1
iF
APR.2B.1997 14: 17
i . LEUEL 3
2 kii
PREU IOUS DIRECTORY
DRIUE
D IRCTORY
4lTDR _44._....__.___..._.._._.~._._.____..___..__._-.._.______r._
---------.,---------,.-------...---------,.--------.--------r-.
LS
8
.._---.,._._,.--------..._----..-------..-------..-DBCDEFGH IJKLMNOPQRSTUUWXYZ
I i I I , , . I . . I i I I , . . , I . . i i I I . I . . I . i I . , I i I . , I . i I I ,. .. ,. .II I i
(A: )
NEXT
DIRECTORY
CANCEL
2k
REF
123456789 !~"$~A&* () _=+/~) () \: ()
abcdefghijkliinopqrstuvwKYz? , ... ; :
MORE
CANCEL
m
-.
~
Figure 4-32
EXECUTE
dB dB
(CREATE
DIRECTORY)
er 2-3
dB
km
1/4
dB/km
EXTERNAL KEYBOARD : CTRL+F6 FULL KEY INPUT.
E~F
DIRECTORY CREATION Screen
CD Drive name
en Directory name
o Directory list
(l Label input area. Up to 12 characters can be entered.
( The cursor indicating input position.

( The cursor indicating position of the selected character.
(j Label display area.
:SELECT ITEM
DELETE
JUN.19.1997 21:38
LEUEL 3
48 km
PREU IOUS DIRECTORY
dB/ 15.8/
DRIUE I FLOPPY DISK (A:) I :

\OTDR\AQ7228
i I I I
_~_~_~_~_~~_~_~________~_mm____~___________~_____m_~_________~r---;~~;;~-_~_;~;m(~-:-)___----m--
NEXT
-----------1-----------f-----------1-----------I---------l----..-------f-- . i
CANCEL
!!!!!
i i i ~TDR
LSA
DIRECTORY
5k
CANCEL
Distance: km
8.888 km
PW : 1 ~s

4.851km/ 8m
EXECU TE
(DELETE
ATTEN : 7. 58dB
AUERAGES 131k (2A17)
ELECT THE DELETE DIRECTORY.
Figure 4-33
lOR : 1.48888
DIRECTORY)
1/1
E iF
DIRECTORY DELETION Screen
(2) Key functions
(MODE) key:
(Fl - F5) keys:
Selects the FIE mode.

Available functions are assigned according to the software key menu. Calls the help screen. Invalid. Invalid. Redraws waveforms (-74.2 Measurement).
Stars or stops a measurement. Measurement data
(HELP) key:
(DISTANCE SCALE) key: (dB SCALE) key: (PREVIEW) key: (A VERAGING START/STOP) key:
(PRINT) key:
Rotary knob:
currently displayed is lost (-74.2 Measurement). Outputs screen information to the printer. Rotary knob has different functions depending on the function selected. g When "(g SELECT MENU" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select MENU. Press the rotary knob to open the selected MENU. g When "(g SELECT ITEM" is being displayed Rotate the rotary knob to select ITEM. Press the rotary knob to enter the selected ITEM.
(3) Setup method
CD Formatting (A floppy disk)

(a) Press the -=SELECT DRIVE:: software key.
(b) Select DRIVE using the -= i:: and -=1:: software keys or rotary knob. (c) Press the -=ENTER:: software key or rotary knob to enter the selected drive. (d) Press the -=FORMA T:: software key to call the format type selection screen. Select a desired format using the -= i:: and -=1:: keys, then enter your
selection using the rotary knob.
(e) Press the -=ENTER:: software key or rotary knob to format the specified drive.
o Formatting the drive (F: Built-in RAM, G: PCMCIA1, H: PCMCIA2)

(a) Press the -=SELECT DRIVE:: software key.
(b) Select a desired drive using the -=i:: and c(1:: software keys, or rotary knob.
(c) Format the selected drive pressing the c(EXECUTE FORMA T:: software key or the rotary knob.
CI Creating the directory

(a) Press the .:CREATE DIRCTORY::
software key.
(b) Press the c(PREVIOUS DIRCTORY:: software key or .:NEXT DIRCTORY:: software key to select DIRCTORY.
(c) Enter directory name using the rotary knob (--4.3.2 Label input).
Examples of the directory name entry:
a) ABCDEFGH b) ABCDEFGH.DK (d) Press the c(EXECUTE (CREATE DIRCTORY):: to create the directory.
(e) When canceling creation of the directory, press the c(CANCEL:: software key.
G) Deleting the directory

(a) Press the c(DELETE DIRCTORY:: software key. (b) Press the c(PREVIOUS DIRCTORY:: software key or .:NEXT DIRCTORY:: software key to select DIRECTORY.
(c) Press the .:EXECUTE (DELETE DIRCTORY):: to delete the directory. the directory, press the c(CANCEb software (e) When canceling deletion of
key.
CD When FORMAT is open (LEVEL 2)

SELECT
Selects DRIE
Formats the drive(s).
. DRIE
FORMAT DRIVE
CREATE
Opens CREATE DIRCTORY. Opens DELETE DIRCTORY.

Returns to LEVEL 1.
DIRCTORY
DELETE
DIRCTORY
EXIT
When SELECT DRIVFJFORMA T is open (LEVEL 2)

Invalid
Moves up the cursor
l
ENTER
Moves down the cursor
Enters the drive selection, and returns

to FORMAT screen (LEVEL 2).(-7CD)
CANCEL
Cancels the drive selection, and returns to FORMAT screen (LEVEL 2).( -7CD)
CI When CREATE DIRCTORY is pressed (LEVEL 3)

PREVIOUS DlRECTORY
Moves up the cursor
NEXTDIRCTORY
CANCEL

Cancels the directory creation, and returns to FORMAT screen(LEVEL 2).
Opens software key menu of next item
MORE
( ~(l)
EXECUTE
(CREA TE-
DlRECTORY)
Creates a directory, and returns to FORMAT screen (LEVEL 2). (~CD)
(l When DELETE DIRCTORY is pressed (LEVEL 3)

PREVIOUS
DIRCTOR Y
NEXT
Moves up the cursor
DIRCTOR Y
CANCEL

Cancels the directory deletion, and returns to FORMAT screen(LEVEL 2).
Opens software key menu of next item
MORE
( ~(l)
EXECUTE (DELETEDlRECTORY)
Delete a directory, and returns to FORMAT screen (LEVEL 2). (~CD)
4.4.6
File format
This section describes file formats and recording capacity.

(1 ) File
Measurements done with this unit can be recorded i~ a number of formats (file formats). File has following format per MS-DOS format:
000. 666
~ Extention character: TRA, LST and others can be selected
through the key operations depending on information to be recorded. They are referred to as fie format in this manuaL.
File name: Any number from 000 - 999 can be selected. Such number is referred to as
file number in this manuaL.

(2) File format
Selected appropriate format according to the type of information recorded. See Item 4.4.1 (4).
Table 4-1
Format
TRA
Description
Reading with this unit
Reading with other software

X
Records every information including measurement conditions and

measured waveforms.
When recalled, operation such as cursor move and enlargement of waveform are available. This is a frequently used format.
LST
Records event list after executing the auto search. Measurement conditions and measured waveforms are not recorded. The information is recorded in ASCII format and can be read with software available in the market.
Records the the screen data. Since information is recorded per TIFF format, software available in the market can be used for reading the information.
0 0
0 0 0
X X
TIF
BMP
Records display screen just like taing a picture. Since information is recorded per BIT MAP format, information can be read with software available in the market.
Records measurement conditions only.
Records screen information.
0
0 0
SET
SCR
When recalled, the screen information at the time of recording is displayed. It isn't possible to change re-displayed screen. This format handles files of smaller size.
4.4.7 Printout
The following describes printing of data such as available form the waveform measurement screen.
(1) Printout
Screen information, etc. can be output to an external printer by using the (PRINT)
key.
(2) Procedures
CD Decide a printout format.

Specify desired print type from SYSTEM menu in the SETUP mode. See
Item 4.1.4 (3) CI.
CI Specify the interface port for generating the printout.

Specify desired port from SYSTEM menu in the SETUP mode. See Item
4.1.4 (3) (l.
CI Make sure that connection of the cable to the printer is properly done and the external printer is in on-line state.
(l Call the screen to be printed.
CI Press the (PRINT) key to generate printout to the external printer.

(3) Operation
CD After the (PRINT) key is pressed, the keys can be inoperative for several seconds to dozens of seconds (depending on type of the printer connected). This is not a failure of the unit.
CI If the cable to the printer is not properly connected, the key can be inoperative for several seconds to dozens of seconds after the (PRINT) key is pressed. This, however, is not a failure of the unit.
CI If there is a failure on the printer side, a message (PRINTER NOT READY) may be displayed.
CAUTION
CD Even if the printout format is appropriate for the specified printer, improper printing can occur sometime. CI Direction of forms and printing position must be selected on the printer. This unit does not perform automatic setting of the above.
4. HOW TO lSE THE l:\IT
(4) Printer dip s\vitch settings
Given below are dip switch settings when using DPU411 TYPE II or DPU412 printers.
CD DPU41
1 TYPE II (In case the printer port is Centoronics)
Dip Switch 1 Dip Switch 2 swi 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 swi 2 3 4 5 6

ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Dip switch 2 need not be set.
DPU411 TYPE II (In case the printer port is of the RS-232C)
Dip Switch 1 Dip Switch 2 swi 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SWI 2 3 4 5 6
OFF OFF
ON
ON
Make the RS-232C baud rate setting using the SW4,SW5 and SW6 of the Dip Switch 2. the Dip Switch 1 is being turned "oft'.) (This is valid only when the SWi of
SW4
SW5
SW6
ON OFF ON OFF ON
300b s 600b s
i 200b s 2400b s 4800b s 9600b s
ON ON
OFF OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF
G) DPU412 (In case the printer port is Centoronics)
Dip Switch 1 Dip Switch 2

sw i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
sw i -SW5 of dip switch 2 need not be set.
4. HOW TO lSE THE C\IT
G) DPU4l2 (In case the printer port is RS-232C)

Dip Switch 1
Dip Switch 2
SWI 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SWI 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
Off Off
ON
Make the RS-232C baud rate setting using theSW 4 and SW5 of the Dip Switch 2. (This is valid only when the SW 1 of the Dip Switch 1 is being turned "off'.)
SW4
ON
SW5
ON ON
Off
ON
Off
Off Off
4.5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes special functions available from the options.
MAY.12.1997 10:51
'I'
5.0
dB/
LEUEL 1
20 km
-----....--..-_._-.,-- -_...-_..---..----------...._.._-_.-..----------..--- -----,.--------..-----------
.._---,-----LSA
AUT
--.----..--..---r---...----....-...--.------,.-----__---
.._------..------~-..------..-------.,--------..------._.-..--.-
_..-----..-------~--..------~--------..-----------~----------..------
5k
.._----,-------,.---..-----~-----~----------.,--------.--O.ElOO km
. . I , , I , I . , , . , i I , . I , I , I . . . . . . I , . I . I I I . i I . . i I.. , : . :, :: , . . I . . , . , I . I I i . , , , I I . . I I , I , i i , , . , I I , , I . . , I I I I , , , , I I . . , , , I , , I I , I i . , i , , , , . . I I I I . I I . i I i I I I . I i . . . i I I I . I . . I . I I I I .. I .I .i .. , i. i. I ii I i
2.026km/ 4m
km
....----.----...---------..--..__..._-..-----------..--- ------..--------..--_._-------
-., - -,.----_.- ..-- ---- ,.--- _..--- -- --_....------..------.
Splice Loss:
AUELENGTH:1.31 ~m SM
lOR :1.48000
UERAGES 65k(z-16)
W :500 ns
Return Loss: dB
FACSIMILE
TTEN 6.25dB
1/1
E -= F
Figure 4-33
Screen for Special Functions
CD Fax function:
It sends waveforms through the facsimile.
CAUTION The software key indications vary depending on presence or absence of the optional function. Even if a certain software key is indicated on the screen, it may be inoperable when the required option is not installed.
4.5.1 Fax function (optional)
(1 ) Outline
When the optional ~CMCIA modem card or memory card (containing the fax modem software) is connected, this unit is capable of sending waveforms through the facsimile.
(2) Description of screen
MODE MENU
MAY.12.1997 l:51 LEUEL 2

SEND
FACSIMILE
(( Waiting ))
SET TELEPHONE
NUMBER
COMMENT
COMMENT
SELECT
FILES
FILES
4
EXIT
1/1
E~F
Select a FACSIMILE transmit function.
Figure 4-34 Fax Function Screen

CD
MESSAGE:
DESTIN
Indicates status of the modem.

Indicates the destination phone number.
(?
A TION:
CI COMMENT:
Specifies contents of the first page to be sent on the

facsimile. This information is entered using the
comment function. Indicates file number of the waveform transmitted. CI FAX TRANSMISSION: This software key appears when the fax transmission is ready, namely after the destination and file have been specified. Specifies telephone number of the destination. TELEPHONE NO.: CI Specifies contents of the first page to be sent on the COMMENT: facsimile. (I SELECT SEND FIE: Selects the waveform to be sent on the facsimile. Returns to the special function screen. CI DONE:
(j
FIE:
(3) Preparations for the fax function
CD This fax function is optional, thus the following hardware and software (both optional) are required: PCi0CIA fax modem card (it is our recommendation) PCMCIA memory card (contains the software for the fax modem and recommended by us) Set these two cards to the PCMCIA slots.
o Connect the fax modem card to the subscriber line.
CI Sets the PCMCIA to the FAX MODEM from the SYSTEM CONDITION
menu in the SETUP mode. (At this time, you can also select DIALING METHOD from the same menu.)
(4) Sending the waveform through the"facsimile Press the software key c(FAX FUNCTION:: from the Special Function Screen (Figure 4-33) to call the Fax Function Screen (1) shown in Figure 4-35.
MODE MENU
MAV.12.1997 10:51
LEVEL 2
I MESSAGE
(( Waiting ))
SET
TELEPHONE
NUMBER
I DEST.
COMMENT
COMMENT
SELECT
FILES
FILES
EXIT
1/1
E iF
Figure 4-35
Fax Function Screen (1)
CD Specifying the destination phone number This procedure is the same as that for specifying the labeL. You can enter additional information such as name of the receiver into the c( ::.
4. HOW TO USE THE F'IIT
.~. Specifying the comments
This procedure is the same as that for specifying the labeL. Comments specified here are contained in the first page of data to be sent on the facsimile.
G) Selecting the fi.le number containing the OTDR waveform Select a desired file in the same procedure as that for recalling a file. Transmission of multiple waveforms is available in a single operation.
CV Sending data through the facsimile As the steps \ 1 ~ to \3 ~ are complete and thus the facsimile transmission is ready, the c(FAX TRANSMISSION:: software key appears as shown in the Fax
Function Screen (2) of Figure 4-36.
MODE
MA~.12.1997 10:51
LEVEL 2
SEND
FACS 1M ILE
MENU
I MESSAGE
(( Waiting ))
SET
TELEPHONE
NUMBER
I03-3123-4567 DEST. I
COMMENT
FACSIMILE TEST
COMMENT
SELECT
FILES FILES
001. TRA 002. TRA
EXIT
1/1
E iF
CAUTION
Figure 4-36 Fax Function Screen (2)
CD Both of two PCMCIA slots are used for the facsimile transmission. So,
the direct facsimile transmission of fies in the IC memory card is not

available. They must be copied to a floppy disk or internal memory
before transmission.
CI You can send waveforms recorded in the fie. Prior to transmission, the OTDR screen waveform must be recorded into the fie.
CI When sending waveforms on the facsimile, approximately 40 K bytes free capacity per waveform is required for the internal memory (F drive).
(1 When connecting to a mobile phone, certain restrictions are imposed on

the type of the FAX mode card and mobile phone used. It also requires
the connection cable (optional). Connection to a digital handy phone is

not available.
( A certain type of extension phones may not be used. An easier connection
may be established between the extension phone and an intended external phone by inserting":" between the external callng line identifer and its phone number, thus providing a waiting time of approximately three
seconds. (An example 0:03-1234-5678.)
IA1
5. AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENT UNDER REMOTE OPERATION

This unit is fitted with a RS-232C interface. So, when the unit is connected to a personal computer (controller) with the interface, automatic measurements will become possible for
the unit.
It is necessary to set PRITER PORT of SYSTEM in RS-232C to do this unit in

automatic measurements. (-- 4-27)
5.1 CONNECTION OF RS-232C CONNECTOR

Turn off powers for the unit and the equipments to be connected to the unit. Connect the cable to the (RS-232C) connector on the unit.
Before connecting or disconnecting the cable, be sure to turn offpower of all equipments to which the cable is to be connected or has been connected. lfthe cable is connected or disconnected while power is on, the unit wil malfunction or fai/. Also, use cross cables as the RS-232C interface cables
5.2 MEASUREMENTS UNDER REMOTE OPERATIONS

This unit can be remote controlled using the device messages.
5.2.1 Control commands and transmission data formats
Table 5-1 is the command list, Table 5-2 lists the control commands and Table 5-3 lists the request commands. Control commands can be transmit, dividing by",", within the receiving buffer range.
The receiving buffer of
this unit is 5l2byte (characters). However commands carring "," within themselves should be transmit independently. (e.g. WDMm, n)
5.2.2 Delimiter
As the delimiter of this unit, "e R LF" is available.

5.2.3 Handling the error commands
CD The open space provided between the commands and numerals will be neglected.
(Example)
"R_l, PW _6_" will be dealt being read as "Rl, PW6".
Lrepresents an open space.)
A control command containing an error will be
neglected. Acontrol command with
inappropriate parameter settings will also be neglected.
CI "?" appears when a request command error is found. "?" also appears when there is
no data to transmit.
CAUTION When the SAVE POWER mode is selected for the unit, the RS-232C remote operation becomes invalid. The SAVE POWER mode must be turned off before operating this unit in
the remote mode on the RS-232C.
Table 5- 1 Command List (1/S)

No.
1-1
Items
Functions
Control
commds
Automatic measurement condition
Wavelength
Distance range
comm
ASUR
Request
Readings on the
display
ASU
LAM
R
AUTO SETUP
WAVELENGTH
RANGE
-2
-3 Condition
LAMR
RR
-4 settings
-5 Measurement
Pulse width
Index of reflection
Reflection attenuation
PW
PWR
IORR
PULSE WIDTH
lOR
AT
FIL
lOR
ATTENUA TION
FILTER
-6 conditions
-7 -8
ATR
FILR
Filter
Number of times of averaging procsses

Data size
NUM
DS
NUMR
DSR
AVERAGES
DATA SIZE
OPTICAL PLUG CONNCTION CHK
-9
-10
Plug connection check
PC
PCR
-11
Averaging method
Span lOR
Thresholds of auto splice
AVE
SIOR
AVER
SIORR
SPLR
AVG. METHOD
THRESHOLDS (SPLICE LOSS) THRESHOLDS (RETURN LOSS)
THRESHOLDS (END OF FIBER) SLOPE APPROX.
BACKSCA TTER
-12
2-1
SPL
detection
-2 Condition
settings
-3 Analysis
Thresholds of return loss detection
BSL
BSLR
conditions
-4
-S
Thresholds of end of fiber EFL detection LSA Approximation

Backscattering light level
Waveform trace type
Cursor type
EFLR
LSAR
BS
BSR
3-1
TRC
TRCR
CSRR
TRACE TYPE
-2
CSR
CURSOR TYPE GHOST MARKER

DIST ANCE UNITS dB DIGITS
-3 Condition
Distance units
DM
FIG
DMR
FIGR
settings
-4 -5 Indication
Level indication digits
Updating of the year
YEA
MTH
YEAR
MTHR
DATE/TIME DATE/TIME DATE/TIME
-6 conditions
-7
Updating of the month

Updating of the day
DAY
DAYR
Table 5-1 Command List (2/5)

No.
-8
Items
Updating of
Functions
comm comm
HOU
MIN
Control
Request
Readings on the
display
the hour
HOUR
MINR
DATE/TIME
DA TE/TIME DA TE/TIME DISP
-9
Updating of the minute

Date indication
Time indication
Label indication
Grid indication
A veraging time indication
-10
- 11
DTE
TIME
LD
GD
DTER
TIMER
LDR
DATE/TIME DISP
LABEL
GRID
-12
- 13
GDR
-14
-15
AVD
AVDR
BEEPR
AVERAGING TIME
Beeps
BEEP
-16
4-1
-2 Condition
-3 settings
Waveform indication method

Setting of
DOT
DOTR
the PCMCIAI
PCMA
PCMB
PRD PRO
EP
RM
AS
PCMAR PCMCIAl
PCMBR PCMCIA2 PRDR PRINT TYPE
Setting of the PCMCIA2 Print direction
-4 System
-5 conditions
Printer port designation

External printer type
PROR
EPR
TELR
PRINTER PORT
EXT. PRINTER
REP AET MODE
-6
5-1
Setting of the DIAL TYPE TEL
Continuous measurement mod

Automatic measurement condition
settings
RMR
ASR
-2
-3 Condition
AUTOMATIC SETUP
SOURCE DRIVE..
Automatic measurement condition file designation

Trace storage
ASF
TS
ASFR
-4 Continuous
TSR
measurement
-5
TRACE STRAGE
DEST DRIVE..
Trace storage file designation
TSF
PO
M
TSFR
POR
-6
6-1
Print out command

Marker
Clear the cursor
PRINT OUT
MR
YR
SFR CLR
MARKER
MARKER
-2 Waveform
-3 indication
CC
Y
Auxiliary marker
Slope fit
-4 markers
-5
SF
Cursor link
CL
Table 5- 1 Command List (3/5)

No.
6-6
Items
Functions
comm comm
C
Control
Request
Readings on the display

LABEL
Clear the marker

Label
indication label
7-l Waveform 8-l

-2
-3
LR
To the next event

Insert an event
NEX
IE
Delete an event
Setting of the event markers
DE
EM
-4 Automatic sca1culation
-5
EMR
EYR
Setting of the auxiliary

event markers .
EY
-6 -7 -8 -9
Print list
Event not
PL
EN
ENR
SPPR
SPDR
Number of auto splice detection points
Requesting to transmit the auto splice data

Back to the preceding event
Event tyelindex of
-10
- 11
PRE
EVD
SIORS
I
EVDR
SIORSR
INITIALIZE
reflection
-12
9-1
Setting of
the SPAN lOR
Initialization of the
indication scale
-2
-3
Distance zero point
REF
REFR
SET REF
Clearing the distance zero REC point

conditions
CLEAR REF
-4 Indication
-5
Multiple waveform indication
WDM
WDN
WDMR
WDNR
Multiple waveform indication command

Recalling of the reference waveform
-6
-7 -8
-9
WDRC
Recalling of multiple waveforms
WDRN
WDRR
Recalled waveform status
Composition of waveforms WAVR measured at both ends
",
Table 5-l Command List (4/5)

No.
Items
Functions
comm comm
WAVL
WAVS
FDA
Control
Request
9-10
-11
Setting of the far end point WAVE

Level adjustment of two waveforms
Averaging of connection
loss values
-12
1 l- 1
Readings on the display
Memory address
FDAR
DIRR
-2
-3
Directory designation
DIR
FF
File recording method

Waveform writing
Waveform overwtin'
FFR
DRIVE
-4
-5
FST
RFS
-6 -7 -8
Recorded capacity
FSR
Recorded fie number Recordable number of

waveforms
FAR
FUR
FRC
FP
12-l
-2
13-1
Waveform readout
File list print
Designation of the file to

be copied
Designation of
CPS
CPSR
CPDR
-2
-3
the file to
CPD
CP
hold the copy

Copy
Delete
COpy
DELETE
14-l
15-1
DEL
FIN
Formatting the disc

Creating a directory
Status of
FORMAT
STR
-2
16-1
DRM
ST
the averaging
process
-2
-3
Current averaging count

Indication scale
TIMR
H
HR VR
(Horizontal axis)
-4
-5
Indication scale
(Vertical axis)
Waveform shift
HPOS
HPOSR
(Horizontal axis)
-6
Waveform shift
(Vertical axis)
VPOS
VPOSR
Table 5-1 Command List (5/5)

No.
16-7
-8
Items
Functions
Readings on the commds commds display

Control
Request
Enlarging the horizontal

axis indication
HSP
HSPR
DU
Distance beween the waveform tracing start point and the origin point.
Cursor
CU
-9
CUR
MD
-10
- 11
Calculation result
Print out
Form feed (with AQ7210 alone)
CPY
FED
PRSR
DNR
-12
-13
Internal printer status (with AQ7210 alone)

Number of
l8-1
-2
-3
waveform data
Waveform data (ASCn

Waveform data (Binary)
DR
DBIR
-4
-5 19-1
Indicated waveform data (ASCI) Indicated waveform data (Binary) Resolution

Light Source ON/OFF
Light Soruce CW /CHOP
ILS
WR
WBIR
RESR
ILM
20-3
-4
-5
Visible Light Source

ON/OFF
ISV
-6
-7 Special
Fax transmission
FAX
FADR
FACR
Fax destination designation FAD

Fax comments designation FAC
Selection of fies to be sent
-8 functions
-9
FAN
FANR
on the fax

Table 5-2 List of
Device Message (Control Commands (1115)
No.
Functions
l-l
Setting of auto search
Device Messages Explanation Header Numric field ASU m Selects AUTO SEARCH function among:
m= 0 : Off
1 : Auto distance range
2: Auto AIT
3 : One button
1-2
Setting of waveform
LAM
Selects waveform among: m= 0 : The 1 st wavelength of the unit

1 : The 2nd wavelength of the unit 2 : The 3rd wavelength of the unit
1-3
Setting of distance range
Selects distance range among: m= 0: 10 km 4 : 160 km
1 : 20 km
6: 5 km
1-4
Setting of pulse width
PW
2 : 40 km 7: 2 km 3 : 80 km 8: Selection of pulse widths. m= 0: 5 : 500 ns 1: 6 : 1 lls 2 : 20 ns 7 : 4 lls
3 : 100 ns 4: -
8 : 1 0 lls
1-5
Setting of index of relection
lOR
Selects index of reflection between: m=1.00000 to 1.99999
(in 0.00001 step)

AT
m
Selects gain among:
1-6
Setting of optical return

loss
m= 0 : 0 dB 1 : 1.25 dB
2 : 2.5 dB 3 : 3.75 dB 4 : 5.0 dB 5 : 6.25 dB 6 : 7.5 dB 7 : 8.75 dB
10 : 12.5 dB
II : 13.75 dB
(attenuation)
12 : 15.0 dB
13 : l6.25 dB
8 : 10.0 dB 9 : l1.25 dB
A vailable gain depends on the optical
.
unit used.
FlL
m
ON or OFF of filter.
l-7
Setting of filter
m= 0 : OFF
l: ON

Table 5-2 List of
No.
1 -8
Functions
Setting of averaging' count/time
Explanation Device Messages Header Numrc field m Selects averaging count among: NUM
m= 0: 212 times 7 : 219 times

1 : 213 times 8 : 220 times 2 : 214 times 9 : 221 times 3 : 215 times 10 : 222 times 4 : 216 times 11 : 223 times 5 : 217 times 12: 224 times 6 : 218 times
Selects averaging time among: m= 0 : 10 seconds 6 : 5 minutes
1 : 20 seconds 2 : 30 seconds
3 : 1 minute 4 : 2 minutes 5 : 3 minutes
7
8
: 10 minutes
: 20 minutes 9 : 30 minutes
10 : Infinite
l-9
Setting of
data size
DS
1-10
Setting of plug check Setting of averaging method
PC
1-11
AVE
To set data size. m= 0 : 5 k data 1 : 20 k data To set plug check. m= 0 : OFF 1: ON To set averaging methods. m= 0 : Batch 1 : Split (Normal) 2 : Split (High resolution)
Turns on or off
1-12
Span lOR
SIOR
the Span lOR.
m= 0 : No
1 : Yes
2-1
Setting of
auto splice
SPL
To set detecting levels of splice points.
2-2
detecting level Setting of

return loss
m= X. XX
BSL
m
0.01 to 9.99
Selects return loss detecting levels
among:
2-3
detecting level Setting of fiber end detecting level
m=XX
EFL
m
20 to 70 in 1 step
Selects fiber end detecting level among:
m=XX
3 to lOin 1 step
" C\

Table 5-2 List of
Device Message (Control Commands (3/15)
No.
Functions
2-4
Setting of approximation method
Explanation Device Messages Header Numric field m Selects calculation method between: LSA m= 1 : Two point approximation
(TP A)
2-5
Setting of backscattering light level
BS
m,n
2 : Least square approximation (LSA) Selects the backscattering light level among: m=O: The 1 st wavelength of the unit
The 2nd wavelength of the unit 2: The 3rd wavelength of the unit
1:
n = xx.xx
3-1
64.99 to 10.00
Setting of waveform trace method Setting of

tye of
TRC
in 0.01 setup Selects waveform trace methods between: m= 0 : Dot 1 : Line

Selects tyes of cursor among:
3-2
CSR
cursor
m= 0 : + cursor (Secondary cursor is off.

1 : I cursor
(Secondary cursor is off.

2 : Secondary cursor (+ cursor)
3-3
Setting of distance unit
DM
3-4
Setting of
level displaying digit
FIG
3-5
3-6
3-7 3-8
Correction of year Correction of month Correction of day Correction of hour
YEA
MTH
m m
Selects distance unit among: m= 0 : Display in km 1 : Display in miles 2 : Display in kf. Selects the number of displaying digits below the decimal point of dB values among: m= 0 : 3 digits after the decimal point 1 : 2 digits after the decimal point 2 : i digit after the decimal point Year (4 digits) m= 1980 to 2100
Month
Day
m= 0 1 to 12
m= 0 i to 3 i
DAY
m m
HOU
Hour
m= 00 to 23
5. AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENT UNDER REMOTE OPER.A TlON

Table 5-2 List of

Device Messages Header Numric field m Minute MIN
DTE
m
No.
Functions
Explanation
m= 00 to 59
3-9
3-10
Correction of minute Setting of date display
3-11
Setting of
time display
TIME
LD
Specifies date, time indication and format. m= 0 : None 1 : MMM. DD. YYYY 2 : DD. MMM. YYYY 3 : YYYY. MMM. DD Ditto
Turns on or off the label display. M= 0 : No
1 : Yes
Turns on or off
3-l2
Setting label
display
3-13
Setting of grid display

Setting of averagmg
time display
GD
the grid display.
m= 0: None
1 : Yes
3-14
AVD
Turns on or off the averaging time display.

m= 0 : No
1 : Yes
3-15
Setting of BEEP sound Setting of

wave form
BEEP
Turns on or off the BEEP sound. m= 0 : No

1 : Yes
3-l6
DOT
display method
Selects wave form display method among: m= 0 : Thinned-out indication 1 : Indication Averaging 2 : Max. value indication 3 : Link line indication
4-1
Setting of
PCMCIA 1
PCMA
Selects type ofPCMCIAl slot card

among:
m= 0 : OFF 1 : CARD 2 : HARD DRIVE 3: FAX MODEM

4:
11

Table 5-2 List of
Device Message (Control Commands (51l5)
No.
4-2
Functions
Setting of PCMCIA2
Device Messages Explanation Header Numrc field PCMB m Selects tye of PCMCIA2 slot card among: m= 0 : OFF 1 : CARD
2 : HARD DRIE
3 : FAX MODEM
4:
4-3
Setting of printing direction
PRD
4-4
Specification of printer
PRO
Selects the vertical or horizontal printing direction of the printer among: m= 0 : Vertical 1 : Horizontal 2 : Screen Selects printer among: m= 0:
1 : Centronics 2 : RS232C
3:
4 : FILE
4-5
Selection of external printer type
EP
Specifies type of
the external printer
among:
m= 0 : EPSON 1 : CANON
2 :NEC
3 : HPGL
4: PCL
5 : PostScript
6: SEIKO DPU 411 (Type 2) 7 : SEIKO DPU 412

Table 5-2 List of

Device Messages Header Numric field
RS
No.
Functions
Explanation
Sets the RS-232C parameters: m: Setting of baud rate
4-6
RS-232C setup
m,n,o,
p; q
m= 0 : 300
1 : 600
4 : 4800 5 : 9600
6: 19200
2 : 1200
3 : 2400
n: Designation of data bit number 3:7 n= 1 : 5

2: 6
4: 8
0: Designation of parity 2 : Even 0= o : None

1 : Odd
p: Designation of stop bit

p=
o : 1
2: 2
1 : 1.5
q: Designation of
flow control
4-7
Dial Type
TEL
q= o : Xon/off 2 : none 1 : HARDWARE * Whenever 5 is selected for the data bit number, the stop bit is 1.5. Sets the dial type
m= 0: Tone
1 : Pulse( 1 Opps)
5-1
5-2
Selection of the continuous measurement mode Selection of

the automatic
RM
2 : Pulse(20pps) Turns on or off the continuous

measurement mode:
m= 0 : OFF 1: ON
AS
measurement
Turns on or off the automatic measurement: m= 0 : OFF

1 : ON
" 1 ~

Table 5-2 List of
No.
5-3
Functions
Designation of the target AUTO SEARCH
Device Messages Header Numric field ASF m,n, 0, p, q
Explanation
m: Drive selection
fie
m= 0 : FD 3 : PCMCIAl 1 : Built-in RAM 2: 4: PCMCIA2
n: Directory selection
5-4
Designation of trace storage Designation of files to be stored
TS
0: File type selection 0= 0: Waveform file (.TRA) 2 : Measurement condition file (.SET) p: Starting file No. = XXX 000 to 999 q: Ending file No. = XXX 000 to 999 Turns on or off the trace storage function. m= 0 : OFF 1: ON
m: Drive selection
5-5
TSF
m,n,
0, p
m= 0 : FD 3 : PCMCIAI 1 : Built-in RAM 2: 4: PCMCIA2
n: Directory selection
0: File type selection 0= 0: Waveform file (.TRA) 1 : Screen file (.SCR) 2 : Measurement condition file (.SET)
3:
4 : Screen information (graphic)

(. TIF)
5 : Screen information (graphic) (.BMP)

6 : Event list information (.LST) p: Starting file No. = XXX 000 to 999
5-6
Turning on
PO
Turns on or off
the print out.
or off the print out
m= 0 : OFF
1 : Wave
2 : List 3 : Wave + List

Table 5-2 List of

Device Messages Explanation Header Numrc field m M Sets markers to the cursor position.
m= 1 to 3 (Types of markers)
No.
6-1
Functions
Marker setup
6-2
6-3
Cursor clear Setting of auxiliary markers

Specification of slope fit
Specification of cursor link
CC
Y
Clears the cursor.
6-4
SF
6-5
CL
Sets auxiliary markers to the cursor position. m= 1 to 3 (Types of markers) Turns on or off the slope fit function. m= 0 : OFF 1: ON Turns on or off the link function. m= 0 : OFF 1: ON
Clears cursor markers.
6-6
7-1
Marker clear Specification

of label
X"X
NEX
IE
LC RLF
Selects the label (36 characters maximum)

Refer to Note (1)
8-1
8-2
8-3
To the next event Event insertion Event deletion
Moves the cursor to the next event point. Adds events to cursor position. Deletes events at cursor position. No action is necessary when there is no event at cursor position. Sets current event markers at cursor position. m= 1, 2, 3 Sets auxiliary markers (Y2) at cursor position.
Prints the event list.
DE
8-4
Setting of event marker Setting of auxiliary event marker Print list Event note
EM
8-5
EY
8-6 8-7
PL
ENcRLF
Provides comments for events.

Refer to Note (2)
X.. X
8-8
Number of
auto splice
Event number XX= Comment character string (60 characters maximum) Example: EN 1 C R L F (" 1 " denotes event number) No control command is available.
m=
detection points
:: 1 ~

Table 5-2 List of
No.
8-9
Functions
Explanation No control command is available.
8-lO
8-11
Auto splice data send request To the previous event Setting of
PRE
To moves the cursor to the previous event point.

m
EVD
Display the event type or lOR.
event tye
and lOR
8-12
m= 0 : Specifies event tye

1 : Specifies lOR for respective span Sets lOR for respective spans m= Span (it conforms to the span
employed for the event list)
Setting of Span lOR
SlORS
m,n
n= Specified lOR value

.
(1.00000 to 1.99999)
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
Initialization of display scale Setting of distance ongm Distance origin clear Multiple waveform indication
Initializes the scale
REF
Sets distance origins at cursor position.

Clears distance origin.
REC
WDM
m,n
To call indication of multiple waveforms. m: To request the waveform upon which the marker and cursor are to be
placed. (0 to 3)
n: Enlarging and compressing

n = 0: Only the waveforms designated
9-5
9-6
WDN Requesting for indications of multiple waveforms Recalling of WDRC the reference waveform
Recalling of
m,n,
0, p
by the cursor. 1 : All the waveforms To request indication of multiple waveforms. m, n, 0 and p = 0 to 999: File No.
9-7
WDRN
To recall the waveforms according to "m" and "n" having been requested by the above WDN as the reference waveform. To recall "m" files simultaneously.
(2 to 4)
the multiple waveforms

Table 5-2 List of
No.
9-8
Functions
Explanation
9-9
Status of recalled waveforms Composition
No control command is available.
WAVR
Composes two waveforms measured at

both ends.
of
waveforms
measured at
This function is valid only after the two waveforms have been recalled.
WAVE
9-10
both ends Designation far end of point
Sets the far end point of two waveforms

measured at both ends to the cursor
9-11
Adjustment
of two
WAVL
waveform levels
9-12
Averaging of
splice loss
position. This function is valid only after two waveforms have been recalled. Adjusts levels of two waveforms measured at both ends. This function is valid only after they have been recalled.
Averages splice loss on two waveforms
WAVS
11-1
Recording address
FDA
m,n
measured at both ends. This function is valid only after they have been recalled. Selects devices and addresses of recording files among: m= 0 : FD 1 : Internal memory
2:
3 : PCMCIAI 4 : PCMCIA2
11-2 11-3
Specification
of directory File record format
DIRcRLF
n= 001 to 999 (3 digits) XXX = Directory name

m
X.. X
FF
Selects file record format among: m= 0 : Waveform file (.TRA) 1 : Screen file (.SCR)
2 : File of measuring
3:-
conditions (.SET)
4 : Screen information (graphic)(. TIF)
5 : Screen information (graphic)( .BMP)

6 : Event list information (.LST)
'"7

Table 5-2 List of
Device Message (Control Commands (1 ILLS)
No.
11-4
Functions
Waveform storing
Explanation Device Messages Header Numrc field Records measured waveforms in the file FST at the specified address. the some file No data is overwritten if
number is already existent. Refer to Note (3)
11-5
Waveform overwriting
RFS
11-6
11-7 11-8
Recorded capacity
Recorded fie
Overwrite measured waveforms in the file at the specified recording address. the same file number Nothing is done if is not existent. No control command is available
No control command is available. No control command is available.
12-1
number Number of recordable waveforms Waveform reading
FRC
Reads measured waveforms from the file at the specified recording address. However, the screen file cannot be recalled.
Refer to Note (3).
12-2
Printing of
FP
m,n
Print the list of files II the specified

directory in the specified drive.
fie list
m: Specification of drive m= 0 : FD
1 : Built-in RAM
2:
3 : PCMCIAI
4 : PCMCIA2 n: Specification of directory Example: FPl, (1 means Built-in RAM, and means
directory. )

Table 5-2 List of
No.
13-1
Functions

CPS
Explanation
m: Specification of drive m= 0 : FD 1 : Built-in RAM
2:
Specification of copiedfrom fie
m,n,
0, p, q
3 : PCMCIAI 4 : PCMCIA2 n: Specification of directory 0: Specification of file type 4: TIF 0= o :TRA 1: SCR 5 :BMP 2: SET 6: LST
3:
p: Starting fie No. = XXX 000 to 999
13-2
Specification of copied-to file
CPD
m,n,p
q: Ending file No. = XXX m: Specification of drive m= 0 : FD 1 : Built-in RAM

2:
000 to 999
3 : PCMCIAI 4 : PCMCIA2
5 : Internal printer
n: Specification of directory
p: Starting file No. = XXX

13-3
000 to 999
l4-1 15-l
Copy Delete Format execution
CP
Starts copying.
Starts deleting.
DEL FIN
Refer to Note (3)
To formats disks. m= 0 : FD 1 : Built-in RAM

2:
3 : PCMCIAI 4: PCMCIA2
.: 10

Table 5-2 List of
No.
15-2
Functions
Creation of directory
Explanation Device Messages Header Numric field m,n To creates directories. DRM m= 0 : FD 1 : Built-in RAM
2:
3 : PCMCIAl 4: PCMCIA2 n: Specification of directory name to be created. Full-path specification even in hierarchical structure. Examples: Enter as below to create directory "A" in the built-in RAM:
DRMl, A
Enter as below to create directory "B" in directory A: DRMl, AB To start or stop preview or averaging.
16- 1
Averaging state
ST
m= 0: Stop
1 : Preview
2 : Averaging
16-2
Averaging count
( current)
16-3
Display scale (Horizontal axis)
Selects distane scale on the screen for previw among: m= 1 : 160 km 10:250m
2 : 80 km 3 : 40 km 4 : 20 km 5 : 10 km
11: 125m
12 : 50 m 13 : 25 m
6: 5 km
7 : 2.5 km
8: 1 km
9 : SOO m
l4 : 15 : 2 km l6 : 400 m l7 : 200 m
16-4
Display scale (dB axis)
Select dB scale on the display.
m= 0 : 5 dB/div 1 : 2 dB/div 2 : 1 dB/div 3 : 0 .SdB/div 4 : 0.2 dB/div

Table 5-2 List of
No.
16-S
Functions
16-6
Waveform shift (Distance scale) Waveform

shift (dB scale)
Explanation Device Messages Header Numrc field m HPOS Specifies the display start distance on
the display.
m= XXX. XXX
VPOS
m
Specifies the upper display position (dB)

on the display.
16-7
Distance scale enlargement
HSP
m= XX. XXX Selects saling factor of distance display in averaging or in the Trace mode. m= 0 : 1 time
1 : 2 times
2 : 5 times
3 : 10 times
4 : 20 times 5 : 40 times
16-8
Distance from origin

of waveform
16-9
tracing start point Cursor
CU
16-10 Calculation
Locates the cursor to the distance m. m= sXXXX. XXXXX ("s" is a sign.) The unit of the distance "m" wil be either "km", "mile" or "kt' according to the unit used. No control command is available.
Prints the displayed waveforms.
result 16- 1 1 Printout 16-12 Sheet feeding

l6-13 State of internal printer l8-1 Number of waveform data 18-2 Waveform data (ASCII) Waveform 18-3
data (Binary)
CPY FED
Feeds the form by m lines on the built-in printer (with AQ 7210 alone). (1 SmS999) No control command is available (with AQ 7210 alone).
No control command is available. No control command is available.
:: ""1

Table 5-2 List of
No.
18-4
Functions
Explanation
18-5
19-1
20-1
20-2
Display waveform data (ASCII) Display waveform data (Binary) Resolution FAX FAX transmission FADcRLF FAX
DESTINA TI ON FAX comments Designation
No control command is available. Sends a specified fie on the facsimile

( option).
XX,"
20-3
FACcRLF
XXX...
FAN
20-4
m,n,o,p
ofa FAX file
Specifies destination (phone number) of the facsimile transmission with up to 36 characters. Adds comments to the data to be sent on the facsimile with up to 512 characters. Specifies the file to be sent on the facsimile. m, n, 0, p = 0 to 999: file number

Table 5-3 List of
Device Messages (Request Commands) (1/17)

Explanation Device Messages Header Numric field ASUR m CRLF m=O: Off
1: Auto distance range
No.
1-1
Functions
Set state of automatic search conditions
2: Auto ATT.
3: One button
1-2
Wavelengt setup
LAMR
m CRLF
m=O:
1:
the unit The 2nd wavelength of the unit

The 1st wavelength of
2: The 3rd wavelength of the unit

1-3
Distance
range setup
RR
m CRLF
m= 0 : LO km 1 : 20 km
2 : 40 km 3 : 80 km
4 : l60 km 5 km 6:
7:
8
2km
.
1-4
Pulse width setup
PWR
m CRLF
m=O:1 :2 : 20 ns
5 : 500 ns 1 lls 6: 4 lls 7:

8: 1 0 lls
4:1-5
Setup of
3 : 100 ns
IORR
m CRLF
index of reflection
m= 1.00000 to l.99999
(in 0.00001 steps)
ATR
m cR LF
l-6
Setup of
return loss
m= 0 : 0 dB 1 : 1.25 dB 2 : 2.5 dB 3 : 3.75 dB 4 : 5.0 dB 5 : 6.25 dB
10 : 12.5 dB
II : 13.75 dB
12 : 15.0 dB
13 : 16.25 dB
6:7.5dB
7 : 8.75 dB
8 : 10.0 dB 9 : l1.25 dB Differs depending on the optical unit

1-7
Filter setup
FILR
m cR LF
m= 0 : Off
l:On
.: ..~

Table 5-3 List of
No.
1 -8
Functions
Setup of
Device Messages Header Numric field m CRLF NUMR
Explanation
averaging count/time
A veraging count available:
m =0 : i2 times 1 : i3 times
2 : 314 . times
7 8
: i9 times
: 220 times
l 3 : 2 ;, times
5 : 217 times .
: ii times
10 :i2times
11 :i'times
12 :i-ltimes
4 : 216 . times
6:i8 times .
Averaging time available: m =0 : 10 seconds 6 : 5 minutes 1 : 20 seconds 7 : i 0 minutes 2 : 30 seconds 8 : 20 minutes 3 : 1 minutes 9 : 30 minutes
4 : 2 minutes 5 : 3 minutes
i -9
10 : Infinite
Data size setup
DSR
m CRLF
m= 0 : 5 k data
1 : 20 k data
l-10
Setup of plug check
PCR
m CRLF
m= 0 : OFF 1: ON
AVER
m cR LF
i -11
Setup of
averaging method
m= 0 : Total 1 : Split (Normal)
2 : Split (High resolution)
l-12
Span lOR
SlOR
m cR LF
m= 0 : No
1 : Yes
2-1
Setupof auto
SPLR
m cR LF
splice detecting level

2-2
Setup of
return loss
m= X. XX
BSLR
m CRLF
0.01 to 9.99
detecting level
m=XX
20 to 70 in i step

Table S-3 List of
Device Messages (Request Commands) (3117)
No.
2-3
Functions
Setup of
Device Messages Header Numric field m CRLF EFLR
Explanation
fiber end . detecting level

2-4
Setup of
m=XX
LSAR
m CRLF
3 to lOin 1 step
approximation method
m= 0 : Two point approximation (TPA) 1 : Least square approximation (LSA)
2-S
Setup of
BSR
backscatter -
ing light level
m: 0 to 2 m CRLF Wave-length m =0 : The 1 st wavelength of the unit number 1 : The 2nd wavelength of the unit 2 : The 3rd wavelength of the unit
n CRLF
n = XX. XX 64.99 to 10.00 (in 0.01 steps)

3-1
Setup of
TRCR
m CRLF
waveform displaying method

3-2
Setup of
m= 0 : Dot 1 : Line
CSRR
m CRLF
cursor tye
m= 0 : + cursor (Ghost marker is off.)

1 : i cursor
(Ghost marker is off.)

2 : Ghost marker (+ cursor)
3-3
Setup of
DMR
m CRLF
distance unit
m= 0 : Display in km 1 : Display in miles 2 : Display in kf. FIGR

m cR LF
3-4
Setup of
level display digit
m= 0 : 3 decimal places
1 : 2 decimal places
2 : 1 decimal places
3-S
Year value
YEAR
m CRLF
m= 1980 to 2100
3-6
3-7
Month value
Day value
MTHR
DAYR
m CRLF
m= 0 1 to 12
m CRLF
m= 0 1 to 3l
,,_ "

Table 5-3 List of
No.
3-8 3-9
Functions
Hour value
Minute value
Setup of date display
Device Messages Header Numric field HOUR

MINR
Explanation
m cR LF
m= 00 to 23
m CRLF
m= 00 to 59
3-10
DTER
m CRLF
3-11
Setup of time display

Setup of
TIMER
LDR
m= 0 : None 1 : MMM. DD. YYYY 2 : DD. MMM. YYYY 3: YYYY. MMM. DD Ditto
m CRLF
3-12
label display
m= 0 : No 1 : Yes (Count) 2 : Yes (Time)
3-13
Turn on or off of grid display Turn on or off of averaging

time display
GDR
m CRLF
m= 0 : None
1 : Yes
3-l4
AVDR
m CRLF
m= 0 : No 1 : Yes (Count) 2 : Yes (Time)
3~15
Turn on or off beep sound

Setup of
BEEPR
m CRLF
m= 0 : No 1 : Yes
3-16
DOTR
m CRLF
waveform indication method
m= 0 : Thinned-out 1 : Mean value
2 : Max. value 3 : Link line

4-1
Setup of
PCMAR
m CRLF
PCMCIAl
m= 0 : OFF 1 : CARD 2 : HARD DRIVE 3: FAX MODEM

4:

Table 5-3 List of Device Messages (Request Commands) (5117)
No.
Functions
Setup of
4-2
Device Messages Header Numric field PCMBR
Explanation
m cR LF
PCMCIA2
m= 0 : OFF
1 : CARD 2 : HARD DRIVE 3 : FAX MODEM
4:
4-3
Setup of
PRDR
m CRLF
printing direction
m= 0 : Vertical 1 : Horizontal 2 : Screen
4-4
Selection of printer
PROR
m CRLF
m= 0:
1 : Centronics
2 : RS232C
3:
4 : FILE
4-5
Selection of external printer
EPR
rn CRLF
m= 0 : EPSON 1 : CANON 2 :NEC

3 : HPGL
4: PCL
5 : PostScript
6 : SEIKO(DPU411)
7 : SEIKO(DPU41 2)
.: "1

Table 5-3 List of
No.
Functions
RS232C setting
4-6
Device Messages Explanation Header Numric field RSR m, n, 0, p, qC RLF

m: Baud rate designation
m= 0: 300
1 : 600 2 : 1200
3 : 2400
4 : 4800 5 : 9600
6 : 19200
n: Data bit number designation

n=
0: 4
3:7
4: 8
1:5
2: 6
0: Designation of parity
0= o : None 1 : Odd
2 : Even
p: Designation of stop bit

p=
o : 1
2: 2
1 : 1.5
q: Designation of flow control

q= 0: XonlXoff 2 : None
1 : HARDWARE
4-7
Dail Type
TELR
m CRLF
m= 0 : Tone
1 : Pulse(l Opps)
2 : Pulse(20pps)
5-1
Turn on or off of
REPEA T
RMR
m cR LF
5-2
mode Turn on or
off the
m= 0 : OFF 1: ON
ASR
m cR LF
AUTO SEARCH
m= 0 : OFF 1: ON

Table 5-3 List of
No.
5-3
Functions
Setup of file for AUTO SEARCH
Explanation Device Messages Header Numric field il, n, 0, P C RLF ASFR

m: Setting of drive
3 : PCMCIAl m= 0: FD 1 : Built-in RAM 4: PCMCIA2 2: n: Specification of directory
0:
Specification of file tye,
0= o : Waveform file (.TRA)
2 : Measurement condition file (.SET) p: Starting file No. = XX 000 to 999 q: Ending file No. = XXX 000 to 999
5-4
Turn on or off of trace storage

Setup of file for trace storage
TSR
m CRLF
5-5
TSFR
m= 0 : OFF 1 :ON m, n, 0, pCRLF

m: Specification of drive
3 : PCMCIAl m= 0 : FD 1 : Built-in RAM 4 : PCMCIA2 2:
n: Specification of directory 0: Specification of file type
0= o : Waveform file (.TRA) 1 : Screen file (.SCR)
2 : Measurement condition file (.SET)

3:
4 : Screen information (graphic) (.TIF) 5 : Screen information (graphic) (.BMP) 6 : Event list information (.LST) p: Starting file No. = XXX 000 to 999
5-6
Turn on or off of printout
POR
m CRLF
m= 0 : OFF
1 : ON
.; _ 'Q

Table 5-3 List of
No.
6-1
Functions
Marker position information
Explanation Device Messages Header Numrc field m= 1, 2, 3 MARKER m Refer to Note (4) MR
sXX. :x TT
("s" denotes sign, space or II - ".)
sXX. XXXDB CRLF
6-2
6-3
Cursor clear Position information of auxiliary marker
No request command is available.

YR
m=I,2,3
Ym
Refer to Note (4)

("s" denotes sign, space or "_".)
sXXX. XXXXX TT
XX. XXXDB CRLF
6-4
Turn on or off of slope

fit
SFR
m CRLF
m= 0 : OFF 1 :ON
CLR
m CRLF
6-5
Specified information of cursor link
6-6
7-1
Maker clear Label information
LR
m= 0 : OFF 1 :ON No request command is available. XX. . 'X CRLF To set label (36 characters maximum)
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
To the next event Event insertion Event deletion Event marker information

EMR
m,n m=
Event No.
MARKER n Refer to Note (4) sXXXX. XXXXX TT

("s" denotes sign, space or II - ".)
sXX. XXXDB CRLF
n= 1, 2, 3
8-5
Auxiliary event marker information
EYR
Y2
m=
Event No.
sXXXX.XXXXX
sXX. XXXDB CRLF
Refer to Note (4) TT
("s" denotes sign, space or "- ".)
8-6
8-7
Print list

ENR
m
XXX. "X CRLF
Event note
m=
Event No.
Labels of 60 characters maximum are output.

Table 5-3 List of
Device Messages (Request Commands) (91l7)

Device Messages Explanation Header Numric field XXX CRLF SPPR To output the number of auto splice detection points (including the END point). SPDR XXX,.sXXX.XXXXX TT,
sXX.XXXDB, ::/ XX. XXDB CRLF
No.
8-8
Functions
Number of
auto splice
detection points
8-9
Auto splice data output request
XXX,.sXXX.XXXXX
TT,
sXX.XXXDB,::/ XX. XXDB CRLF
XXX,.sXXX.XXXXX
TT,
sXX.XXXDB, ::/ XX. XXDB CRLF
TOTAL SPAN ORL sXX. XXXDBcRLF . In the order of Event No., distance, splice loss and return loss. Refer to Note (4)
8-10
8-1l
To the previous event Event type/lOR setup State of span lOR
No request commend is available.
EVDR
m cR LF
m= 0 : Designation of event type 1 : Designation of lOR for each span

SIORSR
8-12
m=XX
(Span on the event list)
n CRLF
9-1
9-2
Initialization of display scale Distance .. ongin information

Distance
origin clear
n= X. XXXXX 1.00000 to 1.99999 (Specified lOR) No request command is available.
REFR
sXXXX. XXXXX TT cR LF Sends the absolute distance of the distance origin.

Refer to Note (4)
9-3
9-4
Multiple waveforms display.
WDMR
m,n CRLF
m : Sends waveform No. on which the

merkers and cursor are located.
n : Zoom in or out
0= Current waveform 1 = All waveform
:: ~ t

Table 5-3 List of
No.
9-5
Functions
9-6
Sending the displayed waveform number Recall of the reference waveform
Device Messages Explanation Header Numric field WDNR Transmit the waveform number currently being indicated. Upto 4 waveforms, max.
XXX, XXX, XXX, XXX CRLF
WDRCR
m, n CRLF
Transmit the waveform number recalled by WDRC. Transmit "_1 II when there is no waveform number.
WDRNR
m, n,o,pC RLF
9-7
Recall of multiple waveforms

Turning on
Transmit the waveform number recalled by WDRN. Transmit "-I II when there is no waveform number.
WDRR
m, n CRLF
9-8
or off the reference

waveform in the recalled
waveform
9-9
m =0 : The reference waveform is not available. 1 : The reference waveform is available. n = number of recalls
Composition
of
waveforms
measured at
both ends
9-10
Designation of far end position

Level setup
9-11
for two waveforms

9-12
A veraging of
splice loss
ll-l
Recording address information
FDAR
m, n CRLF
m= 0 : FD 1 : Internal memory
2:
3 : PCMCIAI 4 : PCMCIA2 n= 001 to 999 (3 digits)

1 l-2
Directory information
DIRR
XXX CRLF
Directory name Refer to Note (5)

Table 5-3 List of
No.
11-3
Functions
File
Device Messages Header Numric field FFR
Explanation
m cR LF
recording. format information
m= 0 : Waveform file (.TRA) 1 : Screen file (.SCR) 2 : File of measuring conditions (.SET)
3:
4 : Screen information (graphic) (.TIF) 5 : Screen information (graphic)

( .BMP)
11-4
11-5
11-6
Waveform storage Waveform overwriting Recorded capacity
6 : Event list information (.LST) No request command is available.

FSR
m
XXXX CRLF
To request recorded fie capacity. The capacity is output in bytes.
m=
0: FD i : Internal
memory
2: 3 : PCMCIA I 4 : PCMCIA2
11-7
Recorded file
num ber
FAR
m. n. 0 m : Specification
XXX, XXX, . . . , XXX CRLF
of drive
To request recorded file numbers.
m=
0: FD I : Internal RAM 2: 3 : PCMCIA I 4 : PCMCIA2 n : Specification of directory o : Specification
oftle type o :TRA
I: SCR
2: SET
3:-
.: TIF
5: 8MP
6: LST
,,- ~~

Table 5-3 List of

Device Messages Header Numrc field m.,n, XX CRLF FUR
m : Specification of drive
No.
11-8
Functions
Explanation
Number of recordable waveforms
To request the number of
waveforms
m=
0: FD I : Internal RAM
which can be recorded in files.
2: 3 : PCMCIA I 4 : PCMCIA2 n : Specification
of fie tye
O:TRA 1: SCR
2: SET
3:12-1
4: TIF
5 :BMP
6: LST
12-2
13-l
Waveform reading Printing of file list Information of copiedfrom file
CPSR
m, n, 0, p, qCRLF
m : Specification of drive m= 0 : FD 1 : Built-in RAM
2:
3 : PCMCIAl 4: PCMCIA2
n:
Specification of directory
0: Specification of file type
0= O:TRA
4: TIF
1: SCR
2: SET 3:
5: BMP 6: LST
p: Starting file No. = XXX
000 to 999 q: Ending file No. = XXX 000 to 999

Table 5-3 List of
No.
13-2
Functions Information of copied-lO file
Device Messages Header Numrc field CPDR
Explanation
m, n, P CRLF
m: Specification of drive m= 0 : FD
1 : Built-in RAM
2:
13-3
14-1
15- 1
15-2
16-1
Copy Delete Format execution Creation of directory Averaging state
3 : PCMCIAI 4: PCMCIA2 5 : Internal printer n: Specification of directory p: Starting file No. = XXX 000 to 999 No request command is available. No request command is available.

STR
m CRLF
m= 0 : Stop 1 : Real time

2 : Averaging
16-2
Averaging count
( current)
TIMR
m CRLF
m= 0 : 212times
1 : 213 times
2 : 214 times
3 : 2 i 5 times 4 : 216 times 5 : 217 times
6: 218 times
7: 219 times 8 : 220 times 9 : 221 times
10 : 222 times
II : 223 times
12 : 224 times
16-3
Display scale (Distance)
HR
m CRLF
m= 1 : l60 km 2 : 80 km 3 : 40 km 4 : 20 km
5 : LO km
11: 125m
l2 : 50 m l3 : 25 m
l4 :
l5 : 2 km
16 : 400 m 17 : 200 m
6: 5 km
7 : 2.5 km
8: 1 km
9 : 500 m 10: 250 m
" ~"

Table 5-3 List of
Device Messages (Request Commands) (14117J
No.
16-4
Functions
Display scale (dB)
Device Messages Header Numric field VR
Explanation
m CRLF
16-5
16-6
Waveform shift (Distance) Waveform shift (dB)
HPOSR
VPOSR
m= 0 : 5dB/div 1 : 2dB/div 2 : IdB/div 3 : 0.5dB/div 4 : 0.2dB/div sXXXX. XXXXX TT CRLF Outputs the waveform left end positions. Refer to Note (4) sXXX. XX CRLF
Shift from the
maximum display
position (48.160 dB) is indicated in
straight polarity (in bytes).

16-7
Enlargement of distance scale
HSPR
m CRLF
m= 0 : 1 time
1 : 2 times
2 : 5 times
3 : 10 times
1 : 20 times
5 : 40 times
l6-8
Distance between the

trace start
DU
sXX. XXXXXX
Refer to Note (4)
TT CRLF
16-9
point and origin point Cursor
CUR
sXXX. XXXXXX TT CRLF Output the cursor position.

Refer to Note (4)

Table 5-3 List of
Device Messages (Request Commands) (151l7)

Device Messages Header Numric field MD CURSOR
POSITION SPLICE LOSS
I -2 LOSS UNIT LOSS A LOSS A DIST ANCE A UNIT LOSS B LOSS B
No.
16-1 0
Functions
Calculation result
Explanation
sXXX. XXXXXXTT CRLF sXXX. XXXXXXTT CRLF
sXX. XXX
DB CRLF
sXX. XXXDB CRLF

sXX. XXXDB CRLF sXX. XXXDB CRLF
XXX. XXXXXXTT CRLF

sXX. XXXDB CRLF
sXX. XXX
DB CRLF
DISTANCE B 1. XXXXX CRLF lOR XXX. XXXXXXTT CRLF REF XXX CRLF APPROXIMA TION sXX. XXXDB CRLF RETURN LOSS
XXX. XXXXXXTT CRLF
CURSOR: Cursor position POSITION: Screen left end position . 1-2 LOSS: When Markers 1 and 2 are
displayed, the loss between Markers 1 and 2 calculated by TP A is displayed.
When Markers 1, 2 and 3 are displayed, the total of losses between Markers 1 and 2 and between Markers 2 and 3 calculated by TP A is displayed, and the title will change to "1-3 LOSS."
Refer to Note (4)
Printout 16- 1 2 Sheet feeding 16-13 State of internal printer

1 6-11

PRSR
m CRLF
m= 0 : Ready to print 1 : Under printing 2 : Lack of paper 3 : Headup 4 : Abnormal temperature (for AQ7210 alone)
,,_ -:7

Table 5-3 List of
No.
18- 1
Functions
Device Messages
Explanation
XXX CRLF
To request number of
Header Numrc field

Number of waveform data Waveform data (ASCII)
DNR
waveform data.
18-2
DR
xx. XXX, XX. XXX, . . .

XX. XXX CRLF
To request ASCII waveform data. When the total number of data is over
2 i 6, they will be split and output.
18-3
Waveform data (Binary)
DBIR
DoD1D2' . . . . DnEOI
Upper and lower bytes are output alternately.

(Example)
-l
Do
-l
Di
Upper byte Lower byte
To request binary display waveform

data. The total number of data are
18-4
Display waveform data (ASCII)
WR
divided by four (2-bit shift) and output. (For the controller receiving data with sign and to make the maximum value 17 bits) XX. XXX, XX. XXX, . . .
XX. XXXCRLF
18-5
Display waveform data (Binary)
WBIR
To request ASCII waveform data. When the (screen display) data is over 2 i 6, they wil be split and output. DoDiD2' . . . . DnEOI Upper and lower bytes are output alternately.
(Example) Do
-l
-l
Di
Upper byte Lower byte
To request binary display waveform data. The (screen display) data are divided by four (2-bit shift) and output.
sign and to make the maximum value 17 bits)
(For the controller receiving data with

Table 5-3 List of
No.
19-1
Functions
Resolution
Explanation Device Messages Header Numric field m CRLF RESR m= 0 : 5 cm 2 : 20 cm 1 : 10 cm 3 : 50 cm When waveform data of some other OTDR are readout: m= 0 : 5 cm 5:2 m 1 : 10 cm 6 :4m
2 : 20 cm 3 : 50 cm
4: 1 m
7 :8m
8: 16m
9 :32m
20-3
20-4
20-5
20-6 20-7
20-8
20-9
Light Source ON/OFF Light Source CW/CHOP Visible Light Source ON/OFF FAX transmission FAX destination FAX comments Designation ofa FAX file

FADR
FACR
FANR
XXXXXX..... CRLF
XXXXXX. . . . . CRLF
numbers are currently displayed.

XXX, XXX, XXX, XXX CRLF
Sends waveforms whose waveform Up to 4 waveforms may be sent.
Note (1) Label setting procedure

First, transmit the device message
for the label "L CRlLF". Then, transmit the label text. For example, when setting "ABCD", transmit "ABCD CRlLF".
Note (2) Event note setting procedure First, transmit the device message for the event note "ENm CRlLF".
ENm refers to the event number.
Then, transmit the setting characters.
(In the same manner as when making the label setting.)
Note (3) It is necessary that the following settings have been made before transmitting
Note (3) It is necessalY that the following settings have been made before transmitting the above device messages: Type of the file (FD, built-in memory, etc.), file number, directory and file formation (TRA, .SCR, etc.) (See Item 11-1 through 11-3.)
Note (4) The TT (unit) will be either "I..m", "mile" or "A.f' according to the presetting.
Note (5) Directory setting procedure

First, transmit "DIRR CR/LF". Then, transmit "the directory name CR/LF".
5. AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENT UNDER REMOTE OPERATIO:\
5.3 PROGRAl\1l\HNG METHODS FOR THE AUTOMATIC MEASUREl\1ENTS

5.3.1 Outline
Described below are programming methods for automatic measurements. The program
example below op'eates on the following system configuration. Nevertheless. the
program may be inoperable depending on the version number of
the hardware and
software. CD PC -980 i /PC-9821
(1 MS-DOS
o N88 - BASIC (86) (MS-DOS)
5.3.2 RS-232C cable connection specification

D-sub 25pin
D-sub 25pin
SHELL i- SHELL
1
male
male
2
.. .)
D-sub 25pin
2
5
4
5
.,
D-sub 9pin
6
7 8
=r
conversion connector
20
7
8
17
24
6
17
20
24
,,_ ell
5.3.3
1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120
1130 1140 1150
Transmitting the commands and receiving the data

, * * * * * * * * * * *** * *** *** ** * ***** * * ******** * * * ** ** ** * * ** * * * * * * * *** * * * *
, * I *
AQ-7220
RS-232C Sampling Program

FILE NAME
EXPOO
* * * *
,*
r* r*
I *** *** ** *** ** * * ** ** * * ** * * *** * * ***** ** * * * * * * *** ** * ** * *** * * * * ** * * **

, Start. (To set the par i ty at even,
OPEN ~ COMI : E7 1 n AS # 1
data bit at 7bit and stop bit at Ibit to the No. 1 port.)
PRINT PRINT
# 1 , ~ R2 n
# 1 , ~ RR n
'To set the distance range at lOkm

'Command to transmit the distance range data
INPUT #l ,AS PRINT #1, ~PW2n PRINT #1, ~PWRn
'Recei ving the distance range data
i To set the pulse width at 20ns

i Command to transmit the pulse
width data
1160
11 70
INPUT
#l,BS
'Recei ving the pulse width data
1180 1190 1200 1210

5.3.4 Outline
CLOSE #1, R2 etc.
'END
The program below operates on the following system configuration. However, you need to check version number of the hardware or software used because it may be inoperable on
certain version.
CD HP Vectra OS/20
CI HP BASIC
5.3.5 RS-232C cable connection specification

D-sub 9pin
D-sub 9pin
male
SHELL
2
3
1
7
8
~2 ~~
male
SHELL
4
6
5
~ C 4
5
6.
.: It':

5.3.6 Transmittng the commands and receiving the data
1000 ! *** * * *** * **** * * **** * * * * * ** ** * * * ** * * * * * ***** * ** ** * ** * *** ** * * * * * * * *
1010 ! * 1020 i * 1030 ! * 1040 ! * 1050 ! *
AQ-7220
RS - 23 2C SAMPLE
* *
FILE NAME
EXPOl
1060 ! ** * * * * * * * ***** * *** * * * ** * * * *** **** * * * * ** ** * * **** * * * * * * * * * * **** * * * * 1070 GOSUB Rs set 1080 1090 ! Setting of distance range (10krn) OUTPUT Rs_add; ftR2" 1100 ! Set state of distance range OUTPUT Rs_add; ftRR" 1110 ENTER Rs_add; AS ! Reading of distance range 1120 !Setting of pulse width(20ns) OUTPUT Rs_add; ft PW2" 1130 ! Set state of pulse width OUTPUT Rs_add; ft PWR" 1140 ! Reading of pulse width ENTER Rs_add; BS 1150 1160
11 70
1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320
GOTO End_p
!END
Rs set:!
Rs add=9 CONTROL Rs add, 0; 1 CONTROL Rs_add, 3; 9600 CONTROL Rs_add, 4 ; 3
RS - 23 2C I/O NUMBER RS-232C I/O INZ 9600 I/O BIT/SEC 8 BIT/CHARCTER(3)
STOP BIT 1 (0 )
CONTROL Rs add, 5; 3
RETURN
End_p : END
PARITY NON SET BOTH RTS AND DTR
Outline The program below operates on the following system configuration. However, you need
5.3.7
to check version of
the hardware or software used because it may be inoperable on certain
version.
CD DOSN
QBASIC
5.3.8
RS-232C cable connection specification

D-sub 9pin
D-sub 9pin
male
SHELL
2
3
1
male
7
8
4
6
5
~ ~ ~
SHELL
2
3
1
4
6
5
5.3.9
Transmitting the commands and receiving the data

I *** * * * **** * * ******** * *** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *** ***** * ** ** ** * ** *
,* I*
, * , *
AQ-7220
RS-232C Sampling Program

FILE NAME
EXP02
* *
,*
I ** * * * * *** * * ** ** * **** * * **** * * ** * * ** ** * * * * * * * * * * * ** ** * * * ** * ** ** *** *
OPEN "COM1:300,N,8,1,LF" FOR RANDOM AS #1 '300 BIT/SEC '8 BIT/CHARACTER
i STOP BIT 1
PRINT #1, "R2 " PRINT #1, "RR"
I N PUT
#1, AS PRINT #1, "PW2" PRINT #1, " PWR" INPUT #1, BS
i Setting of distance range(10km) 'Set state of distance range ' Reading of distance range i Setting of pulse width(20ns) , Set state of pulse width ' Reading of pulse width
'PARITY NON
CLOSE # 1 'END
" A"
6. HOW TO USE THE OPTIONS

6.1 HOW TO USE THE MOUSE
6.1.1 Connecting the mouse
CD Turn "off' the power switch of
this unit.
CV Connect the mouse cable to the connector, being marked "MOUSE", located on the
upper surface of
this unit before turning "on" the power switch.
6.1.2 Operating the mouse

(l) Setting to respective modes and menus
By clicking on the mode keys and-fuction keys on the image plane using the leftthe mouse, identical results to activating the mode keys and function hand button of keys on the keyboard of the unit can be obtained.
(2) Enlarging or contracting the picture
By clicking on the xxkm/xxm, xx
dB/ windows, the picture can be enlarged or contracted in the horizontal axis and in the vertical axis in cyclic sequence.
Clicking on the "PR" appearing at lower right on the image plane using the left-hand the mouse activates the "printout".
(3) Printing out the indications
button of
(4) Executing preview/averaging
Clicking on the "RT" appearing at lower right on the image plane using the left-hand button of the mouse activates the "preview" and clicking on the "ST" activates the "averaging process".
6.1.3 Precautions when using the mouse
CD The mouse does not work to execute "shifting the horizontal axis" and "shifting the
vertical axis".
CV Even while the mouse is being connected to the unit, ordinary operations using the keyboard panel of this unit are also valid.
h- 1
MAY. 12. 1997 16:6
DISPLAY LEUEL 2
dB/ 15.l
--.. -------- ------ ---.. -- f -- .. - -----1 --- ----.. -- -f'" - -.. -------1-- ---- ---..- -f-'" ---.. --1---- --.. - -r--------- --1--- -...... ----- - --- -- ---, -_.. --- - _.. - - -,. - - --- ---..., - - -- -- -- --,,--- - -- - --- ,-- - ------ - - - r- ------ ----., - - -- -- ----r----- -_.. -- -.,- ---- --- ----
- - - -- - .. - ---., --- --- --_.. --,. --- ------ --., --.. -- -- ----..- - -_.. ---- --.,- -- -- --_.. --.. ,.------_.. --...,- -- ------,.- --_.. -_.. - -- .,-------- -......
----- - -- ---, ----- ---- - - - r -- - - -- ----., -- - ---- ---..,.- -- - - --- ---, -- - -.. ___ _ ___,._.. ___ __ _ __ _.,_ ____
LSA
AUT
-- ---- --- --1-- - -- - - --.. - r --- -- - - ---1--- - ---- --- r- - ------.. -- 1 --- -- --- ..---r---- -- -- -.. - 1- - ---
5k
-- --- - -- --- 1 -- - --.. - - - --- r -- --- ----- - 1-- - ---- --- - r- - - - - ---- -,-- - -- --- --- -r-- -- - -- - -- -1-----..
----- - - - - - -1--- - -- - ----- f --- --------1-- - - - --- --- r- --- - --- --1--- -- ------- f-- - - -- ---,------
I I I I . I I I I : i I : I : i : I : I : I : I : i I I I i I I i I I I , , I I '~I I, i, ., I I I I I I I I I I I , , I . I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I , . I I I !I I !I !I!I ! ! ! i : : !: : !: !:! i !

, , ,
2 km
MARXER 1
MARXER 2
CLEAR CURSOR
MORE
Distance:
PW :5 ns
ATTEN : 6.25dB

2. 26km! 4m
EXIT
lOR : 1.4B
AUERAGES 65k(2A16)
Fig. 6-1
ET THE SELECTED MARXER AT THE CURSOR POS I T ION.
~lR~ E iF
1/3
A screem while the mouse is being used.
6.2 HOW TO USE THE KEYBOARD

6.2.1 Connecting the keyboard
CD Turn "off' the power switch of this unit.

o Connect the key board cable to the connector, being marked "KEYBOARD", located
on the upper surface of
this unit before turning "on" the power switch.
6.2.2 Operating the keyboard

(l) Operating the keyboard CD
The relations between the external keyboard keys and the touch keys on this unit are as follows:
External keyboard keys
M
Fl
F2 F3 F4 F5 R
S
Touch key operations on this unit Mode key Function 1 key Function 2 key
Function 3 key Function 4 key
Function 5 key Preview

Startstop averaging
H
* J
V *B P *F
Distance scale Distance shift dB scale

dB shift Print. Feed. Turning the rotary knob clockwise.
--
+Enter Alt
Turning the rotary knob counter-clockwise. Pushing the rotary knob. "Help" key
the AQ7220.
Functions marked "*" are not available with the external keyboard of
" -:
(2) Operating the keyboard CV
Under the label menu (waveform indication mode), the relations between the external keyboard keys and the touch keys on this unit are as follows:
External keyboard keys
Touch key operations on this unit

Function 1 key
Fl
F2 F3 F4 F5
Function 2 key Function 3 key

Function 4 key
Function 5 key Alphabetical and numeric keys Entering the characters and numerals. -+ Turning the rotary knob clockwise. (When ~electing the character) +Turning the rotary knob counter-clockwise. (When selecting the character) Enter Pushing the rotary knob. (When registering the character)
*Fll
CTRL + F6
Feed.
CTRL + F7
Under the label mode, alphabetical characters and numerals can be input directly using the external keyboard. (Full key input mode) OTDR operations can be made using the external keyboard. (OTDR key input mode)
(3) Operating the keyboard CI

Under "Kanji" inputting mode of the label menu (waveform indication mode), the relations between the external keyboard keys and the touch keys on this unit are as follows:
6.2.3 Precautions when using the keyboard
While the keyboard is being connected to the unit, ordinary operations using the touch panel of unit become invalid.
7. MAINTENANCE AND DAILY INSPECTIONS

To safely use this equipment and obtain performance from it, periodic maintenance is necessary.
7.1 CLEANING THE MAIN UNIT

If
the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with water (warm water) and wipe it with a dry cloth.
the case of
CAUTION
Do not use thinner, benzine or alcohol on the case, or the case surface wil be damaged.
7.2 OPTICAL CONNECTOR CLEANING

A dirty optical connector will degrade the perforn1ance. Try to keep optical connectors clean at all times.
(l) Loosen the adapter of optical connector.
(2) Pull out the adapter of optical connector gently.
~)~
(3) Wipe the tip of optical plug with wiping paper using a little bit of absolute alcohoL. Otherwise, blow off dust and foreign particles with a spray for optical parts.
'\ \ ..
\l () 0
(4) Wipe the inside of optical receptacle with wiping paper using a little bit of absolute alcohoL. Otherwise, blow off dust and foreign particles with a spray for optical
parts.
c Q 0
(5) Set the adapter carefully so as not to damage the tip of ferrle against it.
7.3 BATTERY REPLACEMENT

(1) Remove two lower side protectors, and after erecting the stand, loosen two lock screws with a coin, etc., and then open the lid on the lower side.
(2) Since the battery is seen fixed with magic tape when the lid is opened, remove the
magic tape and pull out the battery plug.

(3) After replacing the battery, fix the battery surely with magic tape, close the lid and
tighten the four lock screws.
7.4 FUSE REPLACEMENT

First confirm the supply voltage and then be sure to install fuses as specified in capacity.
(1) Pick both sides of fuse holder with fingers or a pair of tweezers and pull out the fuse holder.
(2) Replace the old fuse with a new one of the specified capacity.
~ ~
(3) Push in the fuse holder to the inlet socket until it is locked to the inlet socket.
7.5 TROUBLESHOOTING
Careful check of a trouble may find it is actually not a trouble. Check a trouble along the
following guideline before asking for repair work.

Symptom
Check point
CD Is the power switch turned on?
Associated chapter
Power does not turn on
Turn it in the
3. I
clockwise direction (CW) again.
CI Is the battery installed?
2.6 2.6
3.1
CI Is the battery properly charged?
(i Is the (EXTERNAL POWER) connector held in place?

CI Is the external power AC connector held in place?
2.6
( Is the external DC supply voltage appropriate?

unit operating voltage is + 120 VOC.
The
o Is the fuse fined to the external DC power?
7.4
3.1
Display not available

(When the monochrome
Is the LCD contrast properly set? Ifnot, adjust it using the (CONTRAST) knob.
display is used)
Isn't the environment temperature too high or too low? The LCD screen goes darker at a high temperature, and
it takes longer time to display at a low temperature.
4.1.
The LCD screen wil return to nonnaI condition when an excessively high or low environment temperature has been eliminated.
The back light (screen) goes off after a certain
period of time
The unit has the power save mode to turn the back light off if any input is done from the keyboard for a specified
period of time.
Is the banery properly charged?

turned off if
The back light is
7.3
the banery goes low.
Measurement not available Is the optical fiber connected as specified?
3.2
Is the optical fiber properly cleaned? Print out not available
Is the printer securely connected to the unit connector?

Is the printer parameters properly set?
Is the printer set to ON LINE?
4.1.4
1.6
Data storage to IC memory Is the card such as ROM or Flash-E2 ROM used? card is not available SRAM card alone is usable with this unit.
Isn't the IC memory card write protected?
7.2
Measurement condition change is not available
Isn't the lockout function turned on?
4.1.4
Attachment
TERMINOLOGY
TERMINOLOGY
Attenuation Deadzone
Refers to the distance from the star point of the -40dB waveform to the point where the reflective attenuation comes within :t. 1 dB of the constant level of back scatter light.
The value wil vary according to the measured pulse width.
Usually, the deflection factor of approximately 1.5 is assumed when displaying the distance.
Attenuation Deadzone
Event dead
zone
Refer to the Fresnel reflection described in the space resolution.

SIN
Refers to the signal/noise ratio. Poor SIN indicates large noise being contained in
the waveform.
Far end
Refers to the fiber end or its vicinity. When the far end cannot be identified due to noise, it refers to vicinity of intersection of the noise and fiber.
OTDR
Abbreviation of the Optical Time Domain Reflectmeter. The OTDR sends pulse light into the optical fiber and acquires its reflected light. It processes the acquired data to display the loss distribution in the distance direction. The OTDR is sometimes referred to as "optical fiber analyzer" or "optical pulse
tester".
Attachment
TERMINOLOGY
Distance resolution
Refer to the description given in the space resolution.

Distance range
Refers to the distance this unit is capable of displaying. You are recommended to select a distance larger than the length of the fiber under test. A longer measurement duration will be required as a longer distance range is selected.
Near end
Refers to the point where the unit is connected to the and fiber or its vicinity.
Near end dead zone
the optical input/output connector. It is represented the area that comes within ::O.2(dB) of the constant level of back scatter light. (Sometimes, ::0.5 dB or ::1.0 dB may be used as the criteria. ::0.2 dB is employed in our company.) Usually, the lOR of 1.5 is assumed for the distance.
The immeasurable distance produced by the reflection of
I Space resolution
Following two points are specified concerning the space resolution.

(l Back scatter light
Refers to the minimum distance in which the unit is capable of identifying the next fusion loss or bending loss point (fresnel reflection or loss point).
~ Definition
The distance in which the back scattering light deviates from its constant level by :to. 1 dB at the slope where a loss of approximately 1 dB is observed).
....-...
1 (dB)
1+0.1 (dB)
........
i
"".. ...-.._-....
::o.l(dB)
Space resolutionCBack scatter light)
Attachment
TERMINOLOGY
Fresnel reflection CI Refers to the minimum distance in which the unit is capable of isolating the succeeding reflection points.
~ Definition
The distance between the peak reflection point of -40dB (protected against
saturation by ORL) and the point 1.5 dB below it. In this case, lOR of 1.5
is normally assumed.
.5 (dB J
Space resolution (Fresnel reflection)
Index of reflection (lOR)
Refers to the ratio between speed of light in vacuum C (rnsJ and speed of light in a medium v (rns). It is represented as C/V (N). Here, the medium is optical fiber. The OTDR calculates distance L (m) based on the time required for the outgoing
optical pulse to return. The following formula is used. L = CT/(2N) m T: The time required for the outgoing optical light to return (in second).
CT is divided by 2 because the time is counted for the round trip. Care must be exercised to enter accurate value for the lOR N, otherwise error will be
produced in the calculated distance L.
i.48 or a value near it is generally used as the LOR.

Gain
Refers to the amplification degree of the amp contained in the unit. With the values displayed on the unit, smaller the value is the greater becomes the amplification degree (the attenuation value is displayed). A higher gain ensures an
waveform of better SIN, however high level portion will be saturated. Therefore,
an optimum value must be selected depending on the object under measurement.
Attachment
TERMINOLOGY
Back sattering light
Scattering, called Rayleigh scattering, develops on the light propagating through the
optical fiber due to minute fluctuations in the lOR in the fiber. Part of scattered
light returns to the incidence plane. This minute light is called the back scatter
light.
With a 1.3l (llm) single mode fiber, normally the backscatter light level of incidence light of 1
the
(lls) pulse light is -50(dB).

Incident light
~
Back sattering light
c? Sattering light
Least minimum approximate
The least minimum approximate ensures smaller errors in the measurements because
it utilizes all data between two specified points in the loss measurement. Thus, it helps to eliminate individual variations in the condition setting. Also, it provides a
better reproducibility of the measurement. On the other hand, if an undesirable reflection is present or drop of the mask occurs, measurement error will become bigger in this approach because such factors are also used in the calculation.
Sampling
Refers to acquiring data.
Number of sample data
Refers to number of data acquired per waveform. With this unit, number of data to be acquired varies depending on the distance range and the degree of magnification selected at that time. The number of data ranges between 5,000 and 20,000.
Sample resolution
Refers to the distance within which data can be sampled.
. .... . ......
it Sample resolution
Attachment
TERMINOLOGY
Splice loss
Synonymous with the connection loss.
Connection point
Refers to fusion connection of optical fiber or plug to plug connection using

connector (mechanical connection).
Dynamic range
Difference of level between the connection end of this unit and fiber and the noise level(RMS).
Noise peak
Noise level(RMS)
Deadzone
Refers to immeasurable portions due to Fresnel reflection or other reasons. There are 3 tyes of deadzone as given below. Refer to respective descriptions provided in this terminology.
CD Near end deadzone.

CI Event deadzone.
CI Attenuation deadzone.
A - "
Attachment
TERMINOLOGY
Secondary reflection
With a large Fresnel reflection, reflected light at that point may return and visible in
the fiber. This is alled the secondary reflection.
OTDR
010
First reflection
Second reflection
Secondary reflection
:i-
2L
Distance L
~:4
Distance L
Two point approximate
It indicates the loss between two specified points by the difference of levels between
them. Thus, this approach is employed when undesirable reflection is contained between the two points. This approach, however, may allow large error due to
personal variations or the points selected.

Breaking point
Refers to the fiber cut point or end of the fiber.

Return Loss (ORL)
Plug to plug connection of an optical fiber will make light reflect. Return loss, ORL, is expressed as follows:
ORL = lO log (P OR/PO) (dB
where, Po: Output light level

PoR: Reflected light level
The general return loss ofFC-PC type plug is -28 (dBJ approx.
Reflection point
The point where reflection develops when a plug to plug connection is made on the
optical fiber.
Attachment
TERMINOLOGY
Pulse width
Refers to width of optical pulse sent from this unit. Normally, it is specified in the
half-value width.
File
Refers to media used by this unit for storing the waveform and measurement
conditions. Media includes floppy disks and internal memory.
Filter
the waveform provides better SIN. However, this process the waveforms or making it impossible to could resulting in rounding angles of identify adjacent Fresnel reflections. Therefore, it is used when inproved dynamic range is needed.
Digital processing of
Format
Media such as floppy disks must have a format compatible with this unit before data is written to them. This work of providing required form to media is called the format.
Fresnel reflection
Incident light to certain position on the optical fiber where the fiber is exposed to air (such as the fiber end point) may be reflected due to different lOR there. This is
called the fresnel reflection.
With an optical fiber cut a t right angles to its fiber axis, approximately 4% (-14 dB) of the incident light will be reflected.
Resolution
Indicates at what fineness a measurement can be done on the target object. With
this unit, following two resolutions relating to the distance are specified. For details, refer to description given for each item.
(l Sample (read) resolution
( Space (distance) resolution
Attachment
TERMINOLOGY
Preview
With this unit, the preview refers to the state in which waveforms are redrawn for every few seconds.. It is very helpful for setting the measurement conditions since waveforms can be checked on the spot. Also, fiber connection work can be done checking the loss in real time.
Averaging
This units is intended for searching very weak signal buried in noise. With this unit,
mean of added waveforms is calculated for improving the SIN. This process is called the averaging.
Read resolution
Refer to the sample resolution.
List
When the unit's automatic connection point search function is used, a list of connection loss, distance to that point and lOR will be displayed. This is called the
list.
Return Loss
Refers to the reflective attenuation. See the description of
the term "reflective
attenuation" for details.
:: Z -
.
..
, L'\
z ~
z:
'" N '"
ci
Ul
VI c
~
UJ
~ :: a: ~ w
a:
Ul
'"
:z
::
~ 'Ii III
,l
~ ::
III
IU
0
en
t:i
-~
!
a:
cr
l.
.:
b:o iQUO iota !.... to
0
i
0 lE
IOOOOOOID
i:
!
I
UJ
~ ::
! 'i .
~ UJ ::
LL
~ UJ
::
t-
C\
0 C\
a.
a t-
tz a a:
a ~ a ~
3:
"
t- LL a m 0
~
w 0
i:: 0
en
~ w :: I1 o
en
LL UJ
t-
-i

Aq7220 Mini Otdr

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Aq7220 Mini Otdr

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

AQ7220 mini-OTDR Instruction Manual

ANDO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

Copyright ANOO ELECTRIC co., LTD. JAPAN 1995

engineer approved by ANDO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

the AQ7220 Series mini-OTDR

(referred to as this unit).

(Europe) Pulse Width

CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT

According to EN60825 :1991 (Europe) Pulse Width

1,4, 10 0.02,0.1,0.4, 1,4, 10

Les etiquettes de scurit sont affiches sur Ie module laser.

NE PAS REGARDER FIXEMENT LE RAYON

AVEC DES APPAREILS OPTIQUES

11 est obligatoire de retourner tout appareil prsentant un dfaut de fonctionnement du

According to EN60825 :1991 (Europe) Pulse Width

0.02, 0.1, 0.4, 1,4, 10

NICHT IN DEN STRAHL BLiCKEN

AUCH NICHT MIT OPTISCHEN INSTRUMENTEN

IPRECAUTION WHN HADLING POWER

This is an accessory of the system

(Drawing No. : GG-62395-81)

PRECAUTIONS FOR BATTERY PACK HANDLING I

(2) Do not short the terminals.

(5) To prevent any troubles of

battery pack, visually inspect the battery pack on a

periodic basis for damage or solution leakage.

location where the temperature does

time without using,

is liable to be affected by the ambient temperature.

IPRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY

o Maintain this manual at a location easy to access.

. Sample safety alert symbols

1. Restrictions on the Operating Environment

2. Restrictions on the Operating Conditions

3. Setup and Installation Work

3.2 Restrictions and bans on the installation environment and conditions

hazard, electric shock or other personal injury can result.

3.3 Banned actions in the system installation

4. Precautions Before Starting the System

information provided in it.

Operate the system in accordance with the procedure provided in the

electric shock or bodily injury can result.

Do not use this equipment at OC or less, otherwise the indicator operation

6. Maintenance and Inspection

7. Actions Required for a System Failure

(1) Priority of hazard information

The priority of hazard information is as follows:

WARNING: Identifies hazards or unsafe practices that can result in severe

Note: Identifies an auxiliary information about exceptional rules,

This manual shows the system operation keys as follows:

Indicates a key top character.

Indicates a front panel or rear panel name.

battery. Otherwise, it may not be able to reactivate.

1. OVERVIEW................... ............. ....... ........ ................................ .............. 1-1

1.3 ACCESSORIES.................... ................... ............... ............................ 1 - 3

1.4 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................ l-4

1.6 APPLICABLE IC MEMORY CARDS ............................................1-7

2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION .......................................... 2-1

EXPLANATION OF OPERATING PANELS ................................ 2-1

DESCRIPTION OF EACH SECTION ON DISPLAY UNIT ........ 2-5

DESCRIPTION OF HELP FUNCTIONS ....................................... 2-l1

ATTACHING/DETACHING THE LIGHT SOURCE UNIT .......2-12

Detaching the unit........ .................................................. ............... 2- 1 2

Attaching the unit........... ................ ........ ...................................... 2-12